diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore index 61413807..cf88e32f 100644 --- a/.gitignore +++ b/.gitignore @@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ target .classpath .project .settings/ -_build +_build/doctrees +_build/locale/.doctrees source/locale translations diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8fc83bd --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:4 +msgid "Configuring CSW" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:7 +msgid "To get to the CSW server configuration, you must be logged on as administrator first. Open 'Settings' from the Administration page and select CSW Server configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:11 +msgid "The Open Geospatial Catalogue Service for the Web (OGC-CSW) service, is a self-describing service that allows query, update and insertion of metadata records. The service can be asked to provide a description of itself, the human who administers it and other information through a GetCapabilities request (eg. http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/en/csw?request=GetCapabilities&service=CSW&version=2.0.2). This form allows you to configure the CSW server and fill out some of the properties returned in response to a GetCapabilities request. A description of each of the fields in this form now follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:15 +msgid "*Enable*: This option allows you to start or stop the CSW services. If this option is disabled, other catalogues cannot connect to the node using CSW protocol." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:19 +msgid "*Inserted metadata is public*: By default, metadata inserted with the CSW Harvest and CSW Transaction operations is not publicly viewable. A user with the appropriate access rights could do this after the CSW Harvest and CSW Transaction operations, but this is not always convenient. If this option is checked all metatada inserted using the CSW Harvest and CSW Transaction operations will be publicly viewable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:23 +msgid "*Contact*: The drop down select list shows the current users in the local GeoNetwork catalog. The contact details of the user chosen from this list will be provided in the GetCapabilities document of the CSW service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:28 +msgid "*Language*: The language that is used in the service description fields." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:30 +msgid "*Title*: The title of the CSW service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:32 +msgid "*Abstract*: The abstract of the CSW service. The abstract can contain a brief description of what the service provides and who runs it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:34 +msgid "*Fees*: If there are any fees for usage of the service then they should be detailed here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:36 +msgid "*Access constraints*: If there are any constraints on access to the service then they should be detailed here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/csw-configuration.rst:38 +msgid "The last function on this page is the CSW ISO Profile test. Clicking on this link brings up a javascript based interface that allows you to submit requests to the CSW server. The requests used by this interface are XML files in INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xml/csw/test." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/index.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a911c4fc --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/index.rst:4 +msgid "Configuring the catalog" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b037f089 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:4 +msgid "Configuring for the INSPIRE Directive" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:7 +msgid "Enabling INSPIRE" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:9 +msgid "From the ``admin console`` > ``settings`` user can configure INSPIRE directive support." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:12 +msgid "When enabled, the INSPIRE support activate the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:14 +msgid "Enable indexing of INSPIRE themes and annexes (`INSPIRE themes thesaurus `_ MUST be added to the list of thesaurus - see :ref:`managing-thesaurus`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:17 +msgid "CSW GetCapabilities includes the INSPIRE section (ie. ExtendedCapabilities) that administrator can customize in ``xml/csw/capabilities_inspire.xml`` and response support language extensions. The language provided defines:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:21 +msgid "Natural language fields are returned in the language requested (see :ref:`csw-configuration`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:23 +msgid "The end-points are returned for the language requested" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:26 +msgid "**INSPIRE search panel** Add INSPIRE criteria in the advanced search panel (eg. Annex, INSPIRE theme)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:33 +msgid "INSPIRE validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:0 +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:36 +msgid "Add details about INSPIRE validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:38 +msgid "Add details about IR INSPIRE guidelines" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:42 +msgid "INSPIRE access point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:44 +msgid "Most of the time, part of the metadata records contains in the catalog are related to the Directive. In that case, it may be relevant to identify the set of records falling in the scope of the Directive and promoting them through a simple virtual discovery service (CSW)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:49 +msgid "First defined an encoding method to identify the records in the scope of the directive. Well used method are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:52 +msgid "Create a group ``INSPIRE`` and publish those record in that group (or a category)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:54 +msgid "Add a specific keyword in the metadata record (the main drawback here is that this keyword is more for managment purpose and will be exchange when the record is harvested)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:59 +msgid "Once all the records are classified following the selected method above, Create a virtual CSW (eg. ``csw-inspire``) which filter automatically on those records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:74 +msgid "Other INSPIRE reference documents" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:76 +msgid "`INSPIRE IR `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/inspire-configuration.rst:78 +msgid "`INSPIRE support in GeoNetwork (2010) `_ provides some details on how the directive is supported and implemented." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f981578d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:4 +msgid "Map servers configuration for geopublication" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:6 +msgid "To publish information from the catalog as OGC services (WMS, WFS, WCS), catalog administrator need to register one or more map servers to publish on. Map servers MUST support the GeoServer REST API in order to work with the catalog. The 2 following implementations have been tested:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:11 +msgid "`GeoServer `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:12 +msgid "`Mapserver `_ and `Mapserver REST API `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:15 +msgid "Setup you map server and then register it from the administration interface:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:21 +msgid "The following parameters are required:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:23 +msgid "Name: The map server label which will be displayed when geopublishing information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:24 +msgid "Description: The map server description." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:25 +msgid "REST API configuration: The URL of the service providing access to the remote configuration using the REST API." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:27 +msgid "Username and password to be used to connect to the REST API." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:28 +msgid "Workspace prefix and URL: The workspace information in which data will be pushed into." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:30 +msgid "WMS/WFS/WCS service URL: URLs of services which will be used when adding references to the services in the metadata record after publication." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/map-server-configuration.rst:34 +msgid "See :ref:`geopublication-usage`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..daf14e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,518 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:4 +msgid "System configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:7 +msgid "Most of the system configuration parameters can be changed by administrator users using the web interface in ``Admin console`` > ``Settings``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration of these parameters is critically important for the catalog in an operational context. Misunderstanding some settings may result in a system that does not function as expected. For example, downloads may fail to be correctly processed, or metadata harvesting from other servers may not work." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:19 +msgid "Since the settings form is a long form, the 'save' button is repeated between the sections and will save all settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:23 +msgid "Catalog description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:25 +msgid "**Catalog name** The name of the node. Information that helps identify the catalogue to a human user. The name is displayed on the banner, in the CSW GetCapabilities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:29 +msgid "**Catalog identifier** A universally unique identifier (uuid) that distinguishes your catalog from any other catalog. This a unique identifier for your catalogue and its best to leave it as a uuid. It will be used by harvester using GeoNetwork protocol to identify the source catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:34 +msgid "**Organization** The organization the node belongs to. Again, this is information that helps identify the catalogue to a human user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:37 +msgid "**SVN UUID** Subversion repository attached to the node. This identifier is created and/or checked on startup to verify that the database match the SVN repository. The repository is used for metadata versionning." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:43 +msgid "Catalog" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:45 +msgid "**Version** The version of the catalog (readonly, version of the database)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:47 +msgid "**Minor version** The minor version of the catalog (readonly, version of the database)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:55 +msgid "Catalog Server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:58 +msgid "**Host** The node's name or IP number (without http://). For example, they are used during metadata editing to create resource links and when returning the server's capabilities during a CSW request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:62 +msgid "If your node is publicly accessible from the Internet, you have to use the domain name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:64 +msgid "If your node is hidden inside your private network and you have a firewall or web server that redirects incoming requests to the node, you have to enter the public address of the firewall or web server. A typical configuration is to have an Apache web server on address A that is publicly accessible and redirects the requests to a Tomcat server on a private address B. In this case you have to enter A in the host parameter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:71 +msgid "**Port** The server's port number (usually 80 or 8080). If using HTTP, set it to 80." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:73 +msgid "**Preferred Protocol** Defined the protocol to access the catalog. The HTTP protocol used to access the server. Choosing http means that all communication with the catalog will be visible to anyone listening to the protocol. Since this includes usernames and passwords this is not secure. Choosing https means that all communication with the catalog will be encrypted and thus much harder for a listener to decode." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:79 +msgid "**Secure Port** The secure port number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:82 +msgid "**Log level** Define the logging level of the application. After modification, log can be checked in the ``Statistics & status`` section under ``Activity``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:89 +msgid "Intranet parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:91 +msgid "A common need for an organisation is to automatically discriminate between anonymous internal users that access the node from within an organisation (Intranet) and anonymous external users from the Internet. The catalog defines anonymous users from inside the organisation as belonging to the group *Intranet*, while anonymous users from outside the organisation are defined by the group *All*. To automatically distinguish users that belong to the Intranet group you need to tell the catalog the intranet IP address and netmask." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:99 +msgid "**Netmask** The intranet netmask (eg. 255.255.255.0)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:102 +msgid "**Network*** The intranet address in IP form (eg. 147.109.100.0)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:106 +msgid "Z39.50" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:108 +msgid "**Enable Z39.50 Server** Enable Z39.50 server. Restart the catalog to make this change active." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:110 +msgid "**Port** Change the Z39.50 listening port. Restart the catalog to make this change active." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:115 +msgid "Proxy server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:118 +msgid "**Use proxy** Enable the proxy in case the catalog is behind a proxy and need to use it to access remote resources." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:121 +msgid "**Proxy Host** The proxy IP address or name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:123 +msgid "**Port** The proxy port" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:125 +msgid "**Proxy username** The username" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:127 +msgid "**Proxy user password** The username password" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:129 +msgid "***Ignore host list** To bypass specific hosts enter a specific IP address or host name such as www.mydomain.com or an address range using wildcards, such as 192.168.2.*. Use | to separate the different host values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:134 +msgid "JVM proxy parameters may also be required to properly set the proxy for all remote access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:141 +msgid "Feedback" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:143 +msgid "Email may be sent by the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:145 +msgid "you are using the User Self-registration system" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:147 +msgid "you are using the metadata status workflow (See :ref:`life-cycle`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:149 +msgid "a file uploaded with a metadata record is downloaded and notify privilege is selected" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:152 +msgid "This section configure the mail server to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:154 +msgid "**Email** This is the administrator's email address used to send feedback." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:156 +msgid "**SMTP host** The mail server name or IP address to use for sending emails." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:158 +msgid "**SMTP port** The SMTP port." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:160 +msgid "**Use SSL** Enable SSL mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:162 +msgid "**User name** Username if connection is required on the SMTP server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:164 +msgid "**Password** Username password if connection is required on the SMTP server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:168 +msgid "Metadata search results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:170 +msgid "Configuration settings in this group determine what the limits are on user interaction with the search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:172 +msgid "**Maximum Selected Records** The maximum number of search results that a user can select and process with the batch operations eg. Set Privileges, Categories etc. This parameter avoid to trigger long action which could generate out of memory error." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:177 +msgid "Catalog Service for the Web (CSW)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:179 +msgid "See :ref:`csw-configuration`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:183 +msgid "Shibboleth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:185 +msgid "See :ref:`authentication-shibboleth`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:187 +msgid "Deprecate those useless settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:191 +msgid "User self-registration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:192 +msgid "Enable the self registration form. See :ref:`user_self_registration`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:196 +msgid "system/userFeedback" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:200 +msgid "Link in metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:202 +msgid "Defined by the formatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:207 +msgid "Metadata rating" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:209 +msgid "If enabled, the catalog will calculate user ratings for metadata from this node only (not distributed among other GeoNetwork nodes). This only applies to records harvested using the GeoNetwork protocol." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:215 +msgid "Download Service" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:217 +msgid "The metadata editor supports uploading one or more files that can be stored with the metadata record. When such a record is displayed in the search results, a 'Download' button is provided which will allow the user to select which file they want to download. This option group determines how that download will occur." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:222 +msgid "**Use GeoNetwork simple file download service** Clicking on any file stored with the metadata record will deliver that file directly to the user via the browser." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:225 +msgid "**Use GeoNetwork disclaimer and constraints service** Clicking on any file stored with the metadata record will deliver a zip archive to the user (via the browser) that contains the data file, the metadata record itself and a summary of the resource constraint metadata as an html document. In addition, the user will need to provide some details (name, organisation, email and optional comment) and view the resource constraints before they can download the zip archive." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:237 +msgid "Metadata XLink" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:239 +msgid "The XLink resolver replaces the content of elements with an attribute @xlink:href (except for some elements like srv:operatesOn) with the content obtained from the URL content of @xlink:href. The XLink resolver should be enabled if you want to harvest metadata fragments or reuse fragments of metadata in your metadata records (eg. when using a contact directory)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:245 +msgid "**Enable XLink resolution**: Enables/disables the XLink resolver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:247 +msgid "**Enable local XLink** Local XLinks are using local:/// URL to make references to related sections instead of HTTP URL. Local XLinks are usually faster than HTTP XLinks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:252 +msgid "To improve performance the catalog will cache content that is not in the local catalog. Clear the cache of XLink from the ``Admin console`` > ``Tools`` if the fragments were updated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:260 +msgid "Metadata update" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:262 +msgid "For each metadata schema, the catalog has an XSL transformation (``update-fixed-info.xsl``) that it can apply to a metadata record belonging to that schema. The aim of this transformation is to allow fixed schema, site and catalog information to be applied to a metadata record every time the metadata record is saved in the editor. As an example, this transformation is used to build and store the URL of any files uploaded and stored with the metadata record in the editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:269 +msgid "**Automatic Fixes**: Enabled by default. It is recommended you do not use the metadata editor when auto-fixing is disabled. See http://trac.osgeo.org/geonetwork/ticket/368 for more details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:276 +msgid "Search Statistics" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:278 +msgid "Enables/disables search statistics capture. Search statistics are stored in the database and can be queried using the ``Search Statistics`` page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:282 +msgid "There is very little compute overhead involved in storing search statistics as they are written to the database in a background thread. However database storage for a very busy site must be carefully planned." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:287 +msgid "Index optimization" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:289 +msgid "Configuration settings in this group determine when the Lucene Index Optimizer is run. By default, this takes place at midnight each day. With recent upgrades to Lucene, particularly Lucene 3.6.1, the optimizer is becoming less useful, so this configuration group will very likely be removed in future versions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:296 +msgid "Open Archive Initiative (OAI-PMH) Provider" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:298 +msgid "Options in this group control the way in which the OAI Server responds to OAIPMH harvest requests from remote sites." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:301 +msgid "**Datesearch**: OAI Harvesters may request records from GeoNetwork in a date range. GeoNetwork can use one of two date fields from the metadata to check for a match with this date range. The default choice is *Temporal extent*, which is the temporal extent from the metadata record. The other option, *Modification date*, uses the modification date of the metadata record in the GeoNetwork database. The modification date is the last time the metadata record was updated in or harvested by GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:308 +msgid "**Resumption Token Timeout**: Metadata records that match an OAI harvest search request are usually returned to the harvester in groups with a fixed size (eg. in groups of 10 records). With each group a resumption token is included so that the harvester can request the next group of records. The resumption token timeout is the time (in seconds) that GeoNetwork OAI server will wait for a resumption token to be used. If the timeout is exceeded GeoNetwork OAI server will drop the search results and refuse to recognize the resumption token. The aim of this feature is to ensure that resources in the GeoNetwork OAI server are released." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:317 +msgid "**Cache size**: The maximum number of concurrent OAI harvests that the GeoNetwork OAI server can support." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:320 +msgid "Restart the catalog to take all OAI settings into account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:323 +msgid "INSPIRE Directive configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:324 +msgid "See :ref:`inspire-configuration`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:327 +msgid "INSPIRE Atom Feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:329 +msgid "Allows to define the configuration of Atom Feeds referenced by the metadata to provide services related to the `INSPIRE technical guidance for download services `_:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:331 +msgid "Select the type of atom feed:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:333 +msgid "Remote: retrieve the atom feeds referenced by the metadata in the online resources." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:335 +msgid "Local (to implement in future versions): create the atom feed using the metadata content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:337 +msgid "Schedule for feed retrieval: the retrieval of the atom feeds can be scheduled to be done periodically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:339 +msgid "Atom protocol value: value of the protocol in the metadata online resources to identify the atom feed resources (the default value is INSPIRE Atom). GeoNetwork identifies an Atom file from other resources by looking at the protocol value of the onlineresource. Since there is no general accepted value for this protocol, GeoNetwork allows an administrator to set the value to be used as protocol identifying Atom resources::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:358 +msgid "The following services are available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:360 +msgid "http://SERVER/geonetwork/opensearch/eng/UUID/OpenSearchDescription.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:361 +msgid "http://SERVER/geonetwork/opensearch/eng/UUID/search?queryParams" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:362 +msgid "http://SERVER/geonetwork/opensearch/eng/search?queryParams" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:363 +msgid "http://SERVER/geonetwork/opensearch/eng/UUID/describe?queryParams" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:364 +msgid "http://SERVER/geonetwork/opensearch/eng/describe?queryParams" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:366 +msgid "In above url's {UUID} is the fileidentifier of the download service metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:368 +msgid "In the service feed of your download service make sure to add the GeoNetwork OpenSearch endpoint as the OpenSearchDescription for the service::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:374 +msgid "The INSPIRE Atom/OpenSearch implementation can be verified with the Atom tests in Esdin Test Framework (http://elfproject.eu/documentation/geotool/etf) or INSPIRE metadata validator (http://inspire-geoportal.ec.europa.eu/validator2)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:381 +msgid "Multi-Threaded Indexing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:383 +msgid "Configuration settings in this group determine how many processor threads are allocated to indexing tasks in GeoNetwork. If your machine has many processor cores, you can now determine how many to allocate to GeoNetwork indexing tasks. This can bring dramatic speed improvements on large indexing tasks (eg. changing the privileges on 20,000 records) because GeoNetwork can split the indexing task into a number of pieces and assign them to different processor cores." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:385 +msgid "*Number of processing threads* The maximum number of processing threads that can be allocated to an indexing task." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:387 +msgid "Note: this option is only available for databases that have been tested. Those databases are PostGIS and Oracle. You should also carefully consider how many connections to the database you allocate in the database configuration as each thread could tie up one database connection for the duration of a long indexing session (for example). See the advanced configuration for more details of how to configure the number of connections in the database connection pool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:391 +msgid "Multilingual Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:393 +msgid "Options in this group determine how GeoNetwork will search metadata in multiple languages." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:395 +msgid "*Enable auto-detecting search request language:* If this option is selected, GeoNetwork will analyse the search query and attempt to detect the language that is used before defaulting to the GUI language." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:397 +msgid "*Search results in requested language sorted on top:* If this option is selected, a sort clause will be added to each query to ensure that results in the current language are always sorted on top. This is different from increasing priority of the language in that it overrides the relevance of the result. For example, if a german result has very high relevance but the search language is french then the french results will all come before the german result." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:399 +msgid "*Search only in requested language* The options in this section determines how documents are sorted/prioritised relative to the language in the document compared to the search language." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:401 +msgid "*All documents in all languages (No preferences)* - The search language is ignored and will have no effect on the ordering of the results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:403 +msgid "*Prefer documents with translations requested language* - Documents with a translation in the search language (anywhere in the document) will be prioritized over documents without any elements in the search language" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:405 +msgid "*Prefer documents whose language is the requested language* - Documents that are the same language as the search language (ie. the documents that are specified as being in the same language as the search language) are prioritized over documents that are not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:407 +msgid "*Translations in requested language* - The search results will only contain documents that have some translations in the search language." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:409 +msgid "*Document language is the requested language* - The search results will contain documents whose metadata language is specified as being the in search language" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:414 +msgid "Metadata Views" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:416 +msgid "Options in this section enable/disable metadata element groups in the metadata editor/viewer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:418 +msgid "*Enable simple view*: The simple view in the metadata editor/viewer: - removes much of the hierarchy from nested metadata records (such as ISO19115/19139) - will not let the user add metadata elements that are not already in the metadata record It is intended to provide a flat, simple view of the metadata record. A disadvantage of the simple view is that some of the context information supplied by the nesting in the metadata record is lost. *Enable ISO view*: The ISO19115/19139 metadata standard defines three groups of elements: - Minimum: those elements that are mandatory - Core: the elements that should be present in any metadata record describing a geographic dataset - All: all the elements *Enable INSPIRE view*: Enables the metadata element groups defined in the EU INSPIRE directive. *Enable XML view*: This is a raw text edit view of the XML record. You can disable this if (for example), you don't want inexperienced users to be confused by the XML presentation provided by this view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:430 +msgid "Metadata Privileges" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:432 +msgid "*Only set privileges to user's groups*: If enabled then only the groups that the user belongs to will be displayed in the metadata privileges page (unless the user is an Administrator). At the moment this option cannot be disabled and is likely to be deprecated in the next version of GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:437 +msgid "Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/system-configuration.rst:439 +msgid "*Allow editing on harvested records*: Enables/Disables editing of harvested records in the catalogue. By default, harvested records cannot be edited." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3d63457 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:5 +msgid "Configuring virtual CSW" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:7 +msgid "This feature of CSW server adds the capability to create custom CSW entry points that apply extra criteria to the CSW requests, allowing to implement several useful cases like, for example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:9 +msgid "Define an INSPIRE CSW entry point to deliver only the INSPIRE related metadata stored in the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:10 +msgid "Define CSW entry points to deliver only metadata related to specific theme/s: climate, boundaries, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:13 +msgid "The ``filter`` parameter value should use the Lucene query parser syntax (see http://lucene.apache.org/java/2_9_1/queryparsersyntax.html) and is use in these CSW operations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:15 +msgid "*GetRecords*: the ``filter`` is applied with the CSW query as an extra query criteria." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:16 +msgid "*GetRecordById*: the ``filter`` is applied with the metadata ``id`` requested as an extra query criteria." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:17 +msgid "*GetDomain*: the ``filter`` is applied as a query criteria to retrieve the metadata properties requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:18 +msgid "*GetCapabilities*: the ``filter`` is applied as a query criteria to fill the metadata keywords list in the GetCapabilities document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:20 +msgid "The list of available Lucene index fields to use in the ``filter`` parameter can be obtained from the files ``index-fields.xsl`` in the schema folders located in ``WEB-INF/xml/schemas``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/configuring-the-catalog/virtual-csw-configuration.rst:22 +msgid "As Harvest and Transaction operations are not affected by ``filter`` parameter, to avoid confusion is better to use this feature as readonly CSW endpoints." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/index.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..503a20a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/index.rst:4 +msgid "Administrator guide" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/index.rst:19 +msgid "All Admin functions are available from the Admin Dashboard from the main menu. On the Admin Dashboard you will find shortcuts to any administration option your role can access." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/index.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a5747737 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/index.rst:4 +msgid "Managing classification system" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..116abffb --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.pot @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.rst:4 +msgid "Managing categories" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.rst:6 +msgid "GeoNetwork has a concept of categories that can be assigned to metadata documents, but these are not represented in the metadata. So when the metadata is exported, the category will be lost. You can use these categories to separate documents into groups, without changing the actual content of the metadata. Categories can be used to filter a search result, or limit the output of a custom csw endpoint." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.rst:8 +msgid "To assign a category to a metadata document. Go to the metadata modification form and select the requested category from the pull down in the menu. Then save your metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.rst:10 +msgid "To modify the available categories in the catalog, from the admin page, open the \"classification systems\" and then the \"category\" tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-categories.rst:12 +msgid "Note: If you add or modify categories, they may not obtain an appropriate icon. These icon are managed in /catalog/style/gn_icons.less. In this file category-classes are mapped to font-awesome variables that map to a certain font-awesome icon (http://fontawesome.io)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d30a18c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.pot @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:4 +msgid "Managing directories" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:7 +msgid "The catalog supports metadata records that are composed from fragments of metadata. The idea is that the fragments of metadata can be used in more than one metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:9 +msgid "Here is a typical example of a fragment. This is a responsible party and it could be used in the same metadata record more than once or in more than one metadata record if applicable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:29 +msgid "Metadata fragments that are saved in the catalogue database are called subtemplates. This is mainly for historical reasons as a subtemplate is like a template metadata record in that it can be used as a 'template' for constructing a new metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:33 +msgid "Fragments can be inserted in metadata record in 2 modes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:35 +msgid "by copy/paste" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:37 +msgid "by link (if xlink support is enabled. See :ref:`xlink_config`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:40 +msgid "When using XLinks, if the fragment is updated, then the related fragment in all metadata records will also be updated (check the XLink cache)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:43 +msgid "Fragments may be created by harvesting (see :ref:`harvesting_fragments`) or imported using the metadata import page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:47 +msgid "This section of the manual describes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:49 +msgid "how to manage directories of subtemplates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:51 +msgid "how to extract fragments from an existing set of metadata records and store them as subtemplates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:53 +msgid "how to manage the fragment cache used to speed up access to fragments that are not in the local catalogue" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:57 +msgid "Managing Directories of subtemplates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:59 +msgid "There are some differences between the handling of subtemplates and metadata records. Unlike metadata records, subtemplates do not have a consistent root element, the metadata schema they use may not be recognizable, they do not appear in the main search results (unless they are part of a metadata record). Therefore, the editor board allows you to search and manage privileges for directory entries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:68 +msgid "From the editor board, choose ``Manage directory`` to access the editor for directory entries:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:73 +msgid "If you do not see the ``Organizations and Contacts`` tab then ensure that you have created subtemplates for contacts for your metadata profile, and that you have loaded them using the ``Metadata and Templates`` section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:75 +msgid "From this page, editors can choose a type of directory using the top tabs, edit/remove/import new subtemplates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:77 +msgid "To import new entries, use the metadata import page and choose the appropriate type of record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:82 +msgid "Like metadata records, they are allocated an integer id and are stored in the catalog metadata table (with template field set to \"y\")." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:85 +msgid "Insert a directory entry in a metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:87 +msgid "From the metadata editor, the directory can be used to populate contacts for example." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:91 +msgid "Open the directory selector, choose a contact and then choose the contact role." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:98 +msgid "Extracting subtemplates from metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:100 +msgid "Many sites have existing metadata records with common information eg. contact information in an ISO CI_Contact element. Directory entries such as these can be extracted from a selected set of metadata records using the \"Extract subtemplates\" API." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:105 +msgid "To use this function the following set of steps should be followed:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:107 +msgid "Make sure you understand what an XPath is - see http://www.w3schools.com/xpath/default.asp for example." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:110 +msgid "Identify fragments of metadata that they would like to manage as reusable subtemplates in the metadata record. This can be done using an XPath. eg. the XPath ``.//gmd:CI_ResponsibleParty`` identifies all responsible party in a records. An example of such a fragment (taken from one of the sample records) is shown in the following example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:167 +msgid "Identify and record the XPath of a field or fields within the fragment which text content will be used as the id of the subtemplate. This XPath should be relative to the root element of the fragment identified in the previous step. So for example, in the fragment above we could choose ``.//gmd:electronicMailAddress/gco:CharacterString/text()`` as the id for the fragments to be created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:169 +msgid "On the API page, choose the registries / collect operation:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:178 +msgid "Fill in the form with the information collected in the previous steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:180 +msgid "Extracted subtemplates can be previewed using the GET mode and once validated, use the PUT method to save results in the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:184 +msgid "Finally, go to the subtemplate directory management interface and you should be able to select the root element of your subtemplates to examine the extracted subtemplates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:187 +msgid "Subtemplate indexing is based on the schema (see index-fields folder for details). Currently ISO19139 index subtemplates using as root element:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:189 +msgid "gmd:CI_ResponsibleParty" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:191 +msgid "gmd:MD_Distribution" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:193 +msgid "gmd:CI_OnlineResource" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:195 +msgid "gmd:EX_Extent" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:201 +msgid "Synchronizing subtemplates with metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:203 +msgid "Once created, the catalog provides the capability to synchronize metadata records with directory entries. For this, use the API testing page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:206 +msgid "The synchronize process use the same parameters as the collecting process with 2 optionals arguments:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:208 +msgid "propertiesToCopy to preserve some element which may be defined in the fragment in the metadata (eg. contact role)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:210 +msgid "substitueAsXLink to indicate if copy/paste mode or XLink mode should be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:219 +msgid "Managing the fragment cache" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:221 +msgid "If metadata records in your catalog link in fragments from external sites, the catalog caches these fragments after the first look up so as to reduce the amount of network traffic and speed up the display of metadata records in search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:225 +msgid "The cache is handled automatically using the Java Cache System (JCS). JCS handles large caches intelligently by:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:228 +msgid "defining a maximum number of cached objects" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:230 +msgid "using as much main memory as possible before moving to secondary storage (disk)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:232 +msgid "providing cache persistence: the cache is saved to disk when the web application is shutdown and restores the cache from disk when restarting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:235 +msgid "You can configure JCS parameters in GeoNetwork using the JCS configuration file in **INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/classes/cache.ccf**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-directories.rst:237 +msgid "Some operations in the catalog (such as harvesting) that generate metadata fragments, will automatically refresh the XLink cache when a new fragment is generated. However, if you are linking fragments from an external site, then depending on how often the change, you will need to manually refresh the XLink cache. To do this you should navigate to the Administration page and select the \"Clear XLink Cache and Rebuild Index of Records with XLinks\" function as highlighted in the following screenshot of the \"Administration\" page." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ed21b9d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.pot @@ -0,0 +1,458 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:4 +msgid "Managing thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:8 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:10 +msgid "A thesaurus is a list of concepts from a specialized field of knowledge. In a metadata catalog, concepts from a thesaurus can be assigned to a metadata record (as keywords) as a way of associating it with one or more concepts from a field of knowledge. For example, a record may be assigned a keyword 'AGRICULTURE - Crops' meaning that the record describes a resource or activity relating to crops in the field of Agriculture. It's a good practice to look for existing thesauri before creating your own thesuarus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:12 +msgid "In GeoNetwork, the process of assigning keywords to a metadata record takes place in the metadata editor. The user can choose concepts from one or more thesauri to associate the record with the concepts described by those concepts. This process is supported for both ISO19115/19139 and dublin core metadata records using an thesaurus picker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:14 +msgid "Concepts within a field of knowledge or in different fields of knowledge may be related or even be equivalent. For example, in a thesaurus describing geographic regions, the Australian state of 'Tasmania' is a specialization of the country of Australia. As an example of overlapping concepts in different fields, a thesaurus describing science activities in the field of global change may have concepts relating to agricultural activities that will be equivalent to terms from a thesaurus that describes the themes used in a map series." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:16 +msgid "In GeoNetwork, thesauri are represented as SKOS (http://www.w3.org/TR/skos-reference) and stored in an application/xml+rdf encoding. SKOS captures concepts and relationships between concepts. SKOS thesauri can be imported from standalone files or they can be generated from ISO19135 register records in a GeoNetwork catalog. ISO19135 (more on this below) not only captures the concepts and relationships between the concepts, but (amongst other things) how the concepts have evolved and most importantly, who has contributed to and managed the evolution of the concepts and the thesauri itself." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:19 +msgid "External, Local and Register Thesauri" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:21 +msgid "There are three types of thesaurus in GeoNetwork. The different types are based on where the thesaurus comes from:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:23 +msgid "*External*: A thesaurus managed by an external organisation and imported as a SKOS file. It is flagged to ``external`` which means that users are not allowed to edit the thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:25 +msgid "*Local*: A thesaurus built in the GeoNetwork thesaurus editor and stored as a SKOS file. It is flagged as ``local`` which means that users are allowed to edit the thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:27 +msgid "*Register*: A SKOS thesaurus created from an ISO19135 register record. Users can edit the thesaurus by changing the content of the ISO19135 register record in the GeoNetwork metadata editor and then regenerating the thesaurus. Users cannot edit the thesaurus in thesaurus manager." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:30 +msgid "ISO19115/19139 Thesaurus Categories" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:32 +msgid "All thesauri in GeoNetwork are categorized using the codelist values for the gmd:MD_KeywordTypeCode element from ISO19115/19139. The categories and their meanings are given below but can also be found in http://www.isotc211.org/2005/resources/gmxCodelist.xml:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:35 +msgid "ISO Thesaurus Category" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:35 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:37 +msgid "place" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:37 +msgid "Thesaurus has concepts identifying a location" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:38 +msgid "stratum" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:38 +msgid "Thesaurus has concepts identifying layers of any deposited substance" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:39 +msgid "temporal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:39 +msgid "Thesaurus has concepts identifying a time period" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:40 +msgid "theme" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:40 +msgid "Thesaurus has concepts identifying a particular subject or topic" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:41 +msgid "discipline" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:41 +msgid "Thesaurus has concepts identifying a branch of instruction or specialized learning" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:45 +msgid "SKOS format" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:47 +msgid "The Simple Knowledge Organisation Systems (SKOS) http://www.w3.org/2004/02/skos/ is an area of work developing specifications and standards to support the use of knowledge organisation systems (KOS) such as thesauri, classification schemes. This format is used by GeoNetwork to store thesaurus information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:49 +msgid "A concept is defined by an identifier, a preferred label, a definition and links with other concepts. Labels and definitions could be stored in multiple languages (using the xml:lang attributes). Three type of links between concepts have been defined in the SKOS format:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:51 +msgid "related terms" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:52 +msgid "broader terms" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:53 +msgid "narrower terms" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:55 +msgid "For example, a concept ``ABLETTE`` could be defined as follow with a label in French and English, linked to broader concept::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:63 +msgid "GeoNetwork supports multilingual thesauri (e.g. Agrovoc). Search and editing takes place in the current user interface language (i.e. if the interface is in English, when editing metadata, GeoNetwork will only search for concept in English)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:65 +msgid "We use SKOS to represent thesauri in GeoNetwork because:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:67 +msgid "it provides a simple and compact method of describing concepts and relationships between concepts from a field of knowledge" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:68 +msgid "SKOS concepts can be queried and managed by the sesame/openRDF software used by GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:71 +msgid "ISO19135 register format" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:73 +msgid "ISO19135 is an ISO standard that describes procedures for registering an item and the schema for describing a list (or register) of items and the processes by which the items can be created and evolve. This schema is available as a plugin for use in GeoNetwork. To use it, you must download and load the iso19135 plugin schema into GeoNetwork. FIXME: We need a standard way of referring to plugin schemas and a standard place from which they can be downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:75 +msgid "A typical ISO19135 register record describes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:77 +msgid "the name and a description of the register" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:78 +msgid "version and language information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:79 +msgid "contact information of those that have a role in the register (eg. manager, contributor, custodian, publisher etc)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:80 +msgid "the elements used to describe an item in the register" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:81 +msgid "the items" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:83 +msgid "The standard information used to describe a register item includes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:85 +msgid "identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:86 +msgid "name and description of item" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:87 +msgid "field of application" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:88 +msgid "lineage and references to related register items" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:90 +msgid "An example of a register item from register of the NASA GCMD (Global Change Master Directory) science keywords is shown below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:122 +msgid "As mentioned earlier, to use a thesaurus described by an ISO19135 register record, GeoNetwork uses an XSLT called xml_iso19135ToSKOS.xsl (from the convert subdirectory in the iso19135 plugin schema) to extract the following from the ISO19135 register record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:124 +msgid "valid concepts (grg:itemIdentifier, grg:name, grg:status)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:125 +msgid "relationships to other concepts (grg:specificationLineage)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:126 +msgid "title, version and other management info" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:128 +msgid "This information is used build a SKOS file. The SKOS file is then available for query and management by the sesame/openRDF software used in GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:132 +msgid "Creating or Importing a Thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:134 +msgid "External and local thesauri are created or imported using the thesaurus manager. You can use the thesaurus manager by:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:136 +msgid "logging in as an administrator" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:137 +msgid "navigating to the 'Administration' page and clicking on the link ``Manage thesauri``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:139 +msgid "The thesaurus manager page will show a list of thesauri that have been created or imported. The upper part of the page provides the user with functions to edit, add, modify or search a thesaurus. The lower part provides a function to upload an external thesaurus in SKOS format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:142 +msgid "Creating a local thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:144 +msgid "To create a local thesaurus, click the ``+`` sign on the category you want your thesaurus to be in. Once created, the thesaurus can be updated through the edit interface. The meaning of each column is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:148 +msgid "**Type** - This is an identifier assigned to the thesaurus in GeoNetwork. It is composed of the ISO category to which the thesaurus has been assigned (see the codelist for the gmd:MD_KeywordTypeCode element in http://www.isotc211.org/2005/resources/gmxCodelist.xml), whether the thesaurus is a local, external or register thesaurus and the filename of the SKOS file that holds the thesaurus. (Note: the name of the file used to hold a register thesaurus is the uuid of the ISO19135 register record that describes the thesaurus)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:149 +msgid "**Name** - This is the name of the thesaurus which is the administrator on creation or the filename if the thesaurus is ting a thesaurus, the name of the thesaurus will be the filename of the thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:151 +msgid "For each thesaurus the following buttons are available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:153 +msgid "**Download** - Link to the SKOS RDF file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:154 +msgid "**Delete** - Remove thesaurus from the current node." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:155 +msgid "**View** - If type is external, the view button allows to search and view concepts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:156 +msgid "**Edit** - If type is local, the edit button allows to search, add, remove and view concepts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:159 +msgid "Import an external thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:161 +msgid "GeoNetwork allows thesaurus import in SKOS format. Once uploaded, an external thesaurus cannot be updated. Select the category, browse for the thesaurus file and click upload. The SKOS file will be in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/codelist/external/thesauri/``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:164 +msgid "At the bottom of the page there are the following buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:166 +msgid "*Back*: Go back to the main administration page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:168 +msgid "*Upload*: Upload the selected RDF file to the node. Then it will list all thesaurus available on the node." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:171 +msgid "Creating a register thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:173 +msgid "An ISO19135 record in the local GeoNetwork catalog can be turned into a SKOS file and used as a thesaurus in GeoNetwork. ISO19135 records not in the local catalog can be harvested from other catalogs (eg. the catalog of the organisation that manages the register). Once the ISO19135 register record is in the local catalog, the process of turning it into a thesaurus for use in the keywords selector begins a search for the record. Having located the record in the search results, one of the actions on the record is to 'Create/Update Thesaurus'." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:175 +msgid "*Search results showing ISO19135 record with thesaurus creation action*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:177 +msgid "After selecting this action, you can choose the ISO thesaurus category appropriate for this thesaurus:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:180 +msgid "*Selecting the ISO thesaurus category when creating a thesaurus*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:182 +msgid "After selecting the ISO thesaurus category, the ISO19135 register record is converted to a SKOS file and installed as a thesaurus ready for use in the metadata editor. As described above in the section on ISO19135, only the valid register items are included in the thesaurus. This behaviour and any of the mappings between ISO19135 register items and the SKOS thesaurus file can be changed or inspected by looking at the XSLT xml_iso19135TOSKOS.xsl in the convert subdirectory of the iso19135 schema plugin." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:185 +msgid "Editing/browsing a local or external thesaurus: add/remove/browse keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:187 +msgid "From the thesaurus administration interface, click on the edit button for a local thesaurus or the view button for an external thesaurus. This interface allows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:189 +msgid "keywords search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:190 +msgid "add/remove keywords for local thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:192 +msgid "Use the textbox and the type of search in order to search for keywords." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:196 +msgid "Editing a register thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:198 +msgid "A register thesaurus is created from an ISO19135 metadata record as described above, so a register thesaurus is updated by editing the ISO19135 metadata record and then regenerating the register thesaurus. The ISO19135 metadata record can be created and edited in the GeoNetwork editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:203 +msgid "Preparing to edit an ISO19135 register record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:205 +msgid "Register records can be very large. For example, a register record describing the ANZLIC Geographic Extent Names register has approx 1800 register items. Each register item holds not only the name of the geographic extent, but also its geographic extent and details of the lineage, relationships to other terms and potentially, the evolution of the extent (changes to name, geographic extent) including the details of changes and why those changes occurred. Editing such a large record in the GeoNetwork editor can cause performance problems for both the browser and the server because the editor constructs an HTML form describing the entire record. Fortunately a much more scaleable approach exists which is based on extracting the register items from the ISO19135 register record and storing them as subtemplates (essentially small metadata records with just the content of the register item). The process for extracting register items from an ISO19135 register record is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:207 +msgid "search for and select the register record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:208 +msgid "choose 'Extract register items' from the 'Actions on selected set' menu" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:211 +msgid "After the register items have been extracted, you should see a results summary like the following." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:213 +msgid "The figure for 'Subtemplates extracted' is the number of register items extracted from the ISO19135 register record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:216 +msgid "Editing a register item" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:218 +msgid "To edit/change any of the register items that have been extracted as subtemplates, you can use the Directory management interface. This interface is accessed from the 'Administration' menu, under 'Manage Directories'. In this interface:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:220 +msgid "select 'Register Item (GeoNetwork)' as the type of subtemplate to edit as follows." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:222 +msgid "enter a search term or just select the search option to return the first 50 register items." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:223 +msgid "register items will appear in the left hand side bar, selecting on one will open an editing interface in the right hand panel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:227 +msgid "Editing global register information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:229 +msgid "To edit/change any of the global register information (eg. register owner, manager, version, languages), edit the register record in the normal GeoNetwork metadata editing interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:232 +msgid "Metadata editing: adding keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:234 +msgid "When editing an ISO metadata record, a keyword (or concept) picker can be used which allows the editor to:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:236 +msgid "do searches for keywords in one or more thesauri in the catalog (search results are displayed on the left)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:237 +msgid "select one or more keywords and add them to the selected items list (using arrows or drag & drop) on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:238 +msgid "add the selected keywords directly into metadata, grouping keywords by thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:240 +msgid "The editor can also control how many keywords from searches are displayed in the keyword picker (default is 50)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:243 +msgid "Notice that a URL pointing to the source thesaurus is included in the Thesaurus Name citation (the actual element used for this is gmd:otherCitationDetails/gmx:FileName). The thesaurus can be downloaded as a SKOS file if it is a local or external thesaurus. For register thesauri the URL refers to the ISO19135 register record from which the thesaurus was created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:246 +msgid "Search criteria: keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:248 +msgid "You can search on keywords in the advanced search interface. To help select a keyword you can click in the keyword search field to bring up a list of all the keywords that have been used in the metadata records in this catalog. These keywords are indexed by Lucene on creation/update of metadata. Each keyword in the list has the number of records that use the keyword displayed next to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-classification-systems/managing-thesaurus.rst:252 +msgid "If an XML element named keyword-select-panel is present as a child of the search element in the *config-gui.xml* file (in the WEB-INF directory), then search for keyword using the keyword selection panel is available as in the metadata editor::" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40c8c9e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:4 +msgid "Managing metadata standards" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:6 +msgid "Metadata records in GeoNetwork are described by a schema. The schema sets out the structuring of the metadata record and provides all the ancillary data and functions to use the schema in GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:8 +msgid "A metadata schema plugin capability has been introduced in GeoNetwork 2.8.0. In 3.0.0 the plugin capability has been expanded to faclitate the fact that plugins can contain java-code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:10 +msgid "Adding a metadata schema to GeoNetwork that is incorrect or invalid can thoroughly break your GeoNetwork instance. This section is for catalogue administrators who are confident about metadata schemas and understand the different technologies involved with a GeoNetwork metadata schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:12 +msgid "A detailed description of what constitutes a metadata schema for GeoNetwork can be found in the GeoNetwork Developers Manual. This section will describe how to access the schema add, update and delete functions and how those functions should be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:14 +msgid "Metadata schemas should be thoroughly tested in a development instance of GeoNetwork **before** they are deployed in a production instance. Errors in a schema plugin (particularly in the presentation XSLTs) may make your GeoNetwork instance unusable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:17 +msgid "Adding a schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:18 +msgid "To add a metadata schema to GeoNetwork, a rebuild of the sources is required. In a source-code tree there are 4 actions to be done in the settings (database) 1." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:20 +msgid "Place the schema-folder in /schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:22 +msgid "Verify and if compatible update the version of GeoNetwork (parent) referenced from the pom.xml file in the schema plugin." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:24 +msgid "Add a reference in /schemas/pom.xml to the newly added schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:26 +msgid "{myschema}" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:28 +msgid "Add references to the newly added schema in /web/pom.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:30 +msgid " ${project.groupId} {myschema} ${project.version} " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:36 +msgid "and" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:38 +msgid " ${project.basedir}/../schemas/{myschema}/src/main/plugin ${basedir}/src/main/webapp/WEB-INF/data/config/schema_plugins " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:43 +msgid "Then Build and deploy your instance of GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:45 +msgid "Via settings in the admin ui you can specify some settings for your schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-metadata-standards/index.rst:47 +msgid "\"{myschema}\":{\"defaultTab\":\"default\",\"displayToolTip\":false,\"related\":{\"display\":true,\"readonly\":true,\"categories\":[\"dataset\"]}," +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9779a94 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:5 +msgid "Authentication mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:7 +msgid "By default the catalog uses the internal database for user management and authentication. However there are some other authentication mechanisms available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:13 +msgid "Configuring LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:15 +msgid "To enable LDAP, setup authentication by including ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security-ldap.xml`` in ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security.xml``. You can then configure your environment in ``config-security-ldap-overrides.properties``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:22 +msgid "Configuring CAS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:24 +msgid "To setup CAS authentication, include ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security-cas.xml`` in ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security.xml``. You can then configure your environment in ``config-security-cas-overrides.properties``. CAS can use either ldap or a database for user management." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:32 +msgid "Configuring Shibboleth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/authentication-mode.rst:34 +msgid "The catalog can operate in a SAML secured federation. Shibboleth should be installed in apache as described `here `_. The catalog is accessed via apache. Setup shibboleth authentication by including ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security-shibboleth.xml`` in ``WEB-INF/config-security/config-security.xml``. You can then configure your environment in ``config-security-shibboleth-overrides.properties``." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbbc9e4c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:5 +msgid "Creating group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:8 +msgid "The administrator can create new groups of users. User groups can correspond to logical units within an organisation. For example groups for Fisheries, Agriculture, Land and Water, Health etcetera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:12 +msgid "To create new groups you should be logged on with an account that has Administrative privileges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:14 +msgid "Select the *Administration* button in the menu. On the Administration page, select *Group management*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:17 +msgid "Select *Add a new group*. You may want to remove the *Sample* group;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:20 +msgid "Fill out the details. The email address will be used to send feedback on data downloads when they occur for resources that are part of the Group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:23 +msgid "The Name should *NOT* contain spaces! You can use the Localization panel to provide localized names for groups." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:26 +msgid "Click on *Save*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:28 +msgid "Access privileges can be set per metadata record. You can define privileges on a per Group basis." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:30 +msgid "Privileges that can be set relate to visibility of the Metadata (*Publish*), data *Download*, *Interactive Map* access and display of the record in the *Featured* section of the home page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:33 +msgid "*Editing* defines the groups for which editors can edit the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:35 +msgid "*Notify* defines what Groups are notified when a file managed by GeoNetwork is downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-group.rst:37 +msgid "Below is an example of the privileges management table related to a dataset." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..111df0d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:5 +msgid "Creating user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:8 +msgid "To add a new user to the GeoNetwork system you do the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:10 +msgid "Select the *Administration* button in the menu. On the Administration page, select *User management*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:12 +msgid "Click the button *Add a new user*;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:15 +msgid "Provide the *information* required for the new user;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:18 +msgid "Assign the correct *profile*;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:20 +msgid "Assign the user to a *group*;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/creating-user.rst:22 +msgid "Click on *Save*." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63214356 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:4 +msgid "Managing users and groups" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:19 +msgid "Default user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:21 +msgid "After installation a default user with name ``admin`` and password ``admin`` is created. Use this credentials to start with. It is recommended to update the default password after installation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:29 +msgid "User session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:31 +msgid "After identification, a user session is created. This session will be closed automatically at some point by the server for security reasons. Default session timeout is set to 35 min (see :ref:`session-timeout-configuration` for details)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:35 +msgid "When there is no activity in the browser and that the session is about to expire (3 min before), a warning is displayed next to the user details:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:40 +msgid "1 min before the end of the timeout, another message is displayed:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:44 +msgid "When the session has been probably cancelled by the catalog, a message recommend to refresh the page and sign in again if needed:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:56 +msgid "Users, Groups and Roles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:59 +msgid "The catalog uses the concept of Users, Groups and User Profiles." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:61 +msgid "A User can be part of one or more Groups." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:63 +msgid "A User has a Role in a Group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:65 +msgid "The Administrator Role is not related to a Group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:67 +msgid "The combination of Role and Group defines what tasks the User can perform on the system or on specific metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:71 +msgid "Users can have different roles in different groups. A role defines what tasks the user can perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:74 +msgid "Roles are hierarchical and based on inheritance. This means that a user with an Editor profile can create and modify new metadata records, but can also use all functions a Registered user can use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:76 +msgid "Rights associated with the roles are illustrated in detail in the list below:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:78 +msgid "**Administrator Profile**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:80 +msgid "The Administrator has special privileges that give access to all available functions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:82 +msgid "These include:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:84 +msgid "Full rights for creating new groups and new users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:85 +msgid "Rights to change users/groups profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:86 +msgid "Full rights for creating/editing/deleting new/old metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:87 +msgid "Perform system administration and configuration tasks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:89 +msgid "**User Administrator Profile**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:91 +msgid "The User Administrator is the administrator of his/her own group with the following privileges:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:94 +msgid "Full rights on creating new users within the own group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:95 +msgid "Rights to change users profiles within the own group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:96 +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:108 +msgid "Full rights on creating/editing/ deleting new/old data within the own group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:98 +msgid "**Content Reviewer Profile**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:100 +msgid "The content reviewer is the only person allowed to give final clearance on the metadata publication on the Intranet and/or on the Internet:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:102 +msgid "Rights on reviewing metadata content within the own group and authorising its publication" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:104 +msgid "**Editor Profile**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:106 +msgid "The editor works on metadata with following privileges:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:110 +msgid "**Registered User Profile**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:112 +msgid "The Registered User has more access privileges than non-authenticated Guest users:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/index.rst:114 +msgid "Right to download protected data" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.pot b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3268a76d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:4 +msgid "User Self-Registration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:6 +msgid "To enable the self-registration functions, see :ref:`system-configuration`. When self-registration is enabled, the login page shows to a user who are not connected, a ``Need an account`` link:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:13 +msgid "Click the ``Create an account`` and fill out the registration forms:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:19 +msgid "The fields in this form are self-explanatory except for the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:21 +msgid "**Email**: The user's email address. This is mandatory and will be used as the username." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:23 +msgid "**Profile**: By default, self-registered users are given the ``Registered User`` profile (see previous section). If any other profile is selected:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:26 +msgid "the user will still be given the ``Registered User`` profile" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:28 +msgid "an email will be sent to the Email address nominated in the Feedback section of the 'System Administration' menu, informing them of the request for a more privileged profile" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:34 +msgid "What happens when a user self-registers?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:36 +msgid "When a user self-registration occurs, the user receives an email with the new account details that looks something like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:61 +msgid "Notice that the user has requested an 'Editor' profile. As a result an email will be sent to the Email address nominated in the Feedback (see :ref:`system-config-feedback`) section of the ``System Administration`` menu which looks something like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:65 +msgid "Notice also that the user has been added to the built-in user group 'GUEST'. This is a security restriction. An administrator/user-administrator can add the user to other groups if that is required later." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:69 +msgid "If you want to change the content of this email, you should modify ``xslt/service/account/registration-pwd-email.xsl``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:97 +msgid "If you want to change the content of this email, you should modify ``xslt/service/account/registration-prof-email.xsl``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:101 +msgid "The 'Forgot your password?' function" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:103 +msgid "This function allows users who have forgotten their password to request a new one. Go to the sign in page to access the form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:109 +msgid "For security reasons, only users that have the ``Registered User`` profile can request a new password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:111 +msgid "If a user takes this option they will receive an email inviting them to change their password as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:125 +msgid "The catalog has generated a changeKey from the forgotten password and the current date and emailed that to the user as part of a link to a change password form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:129 +msgid "If you want to change the content of this email, you should modify ``xslt/service/account/password-forgotten-email.xsl``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:131 +msgid "When the user clicks on the link, a change password form is displayed in their browser and a new password can be entered. When that form is submitted, the changeKey is regenerated and checked with the changeKey supplied in the link, if they match then the password is changed to the new password supplied by the user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:137 +msgid "The final step in this process is a verification email sent to the email address of the user confirming that a change of password has taken place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/administrator-guide/managing-users-and-groups/user-self-registration.rst:148 +msgid "If you want to change the content of this email, you should modify ``xslt/service/account/password-changed-email.xsl``." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/glossary/index.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/glossary/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2df16d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/glossary/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/glossary/index.rst:4 +msgid "Glossary" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/index.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5bd169c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/index.rst:4 +msgid "Annexes" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/mef-format.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/mef-format.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c031ce8f --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/mef-format.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/mef-format.rst:4 +msgid "Metadata Exchange Format (MEF)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/standards/dublin-core/index.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/dublin-core/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c0b209a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/dublin-core/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/standards/dublin-core/index.rst:5 +msgid "Dublin Core" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/standards/index.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b06165e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/standards/index.rst:4 +msgid "Standards" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/annexes/standards/iso19139/index.pot b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/iso19139/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d116660e --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/annexes/standards/iso19139/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/annexes/standards/iso19139/index.rst:4 +msgid "ISO Standard for metadata on Geographic Information (ISO 19139)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/csw.pot b/_build/locale/api/csw.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ff60515 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/csw.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/csw.rst:4 +msgid "Catalog Service for the Web (CSW)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/index.pot b/_build/locale/api/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2cfd502c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/index.rst:4 +msgid "API guide" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/api/index.rst:6 +msgid "The API guide explains how to write code that interacts with the catalog." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/oai-pmh.pot b/_build/locale/api/oai-pmh.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98ec3af9 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/oai-pmh.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/oai-pmh.rst:4 +msgid "Open Archive Initiative (OAI)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/opensearch.pot b/_build/locale/api/opensearch.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcedb572 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/opensearch.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/opensearch.rst:4 +msgid "OpenSearch" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/rdf-dcat.pot b/_build/locale/api/rdf-dcat.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68004a15 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/rdf-dcat.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/rdf-dcat.rst:4 +msgid "RDF DCAT end point" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/the-geonetwork-api.pot b/_build/locale/api/the-geonetwork-api.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c262dafe --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/the-geonetwork-api.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/the-geonetwork-api.rst:4 +msgid "GeoNetwork API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/api/the-geonetwork-api.rst:6 +msgid "The draft API for Geonetwork 3.2.x and later is described on the page http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/doc/api/ ." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/api/z39-50.pot b/_build/locale/api/z39-50.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66467ace --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/api/z39-50.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/api/z39-50.rst:4 +msgid "Z39-50" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/contributing/doing-a-release.pot b/_build/locale/contributing/doing-a-release.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95a6ccdf --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/contributing/doing-a-release.pot @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:5 +msgid "Doing a |project_name| release" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:7 +msgid "This section documents the steps followed by the development team to do a new release." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:10 +msgid "Once the release branch has been thoroughly tested and is stable a release can be made." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:13 +msgid "Get the branch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:30 +msgid "Create or move to the branch for the version" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:42 +msgid "Update version number" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:52 +msgid "Build the new release" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:60 +msgid "Create the installer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:70 +msgid "Test the installer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:80 +msgid "7 Generate list of changes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:95 +msgid "Commit the new version (in submodule first and then in the main module)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:111 +msgid "Tag the release" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:120 +msgid "Set version number to SNAPSHOT" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:149 +msgid "Add migration script for the next version." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:151 +msgid "In ``WEB-INF/config-db/database_migration.xml`` add an entry for the new version:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:161 +msgid "In ``WEB-INF/classes/setup/sql/migrate``, create the SQL migration script:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:168 +msgid "Merge in depending branches" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:170 +msgid "If needed, merge the changes into the develop branch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/doing-a-release.rst:173 +msgid "Publish in sourceforge" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/contributing/index.pot b/_build/locale/contributing/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..290fe646 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/contributing/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/contributing/index.rst:2 +msgid "Contributing guide" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/index.rst:4 +msgid "The guide for people who want to contribute to GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/contributing/making-a-pull-request.pot b/_build/locale/contributing/making-a-pull-request.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35479017 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/contributing/making-a-pull-request.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/contributing/making-a-pull-request.rst:4 +msgid "Making a pull request" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/contributing/translating.pot b/_build/locale/contributing/translating.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18f64dc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/contributing/translating.pot @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:4 +msgid "Translating the application" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:6 +msgid "To translate the client interface, go on `GeoNetwork on Transifex `_. Only the reference language (ie. en) MUST be updated on github. All other translations MUST be on Transifex." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:12 +msgid "Main files to translate are the ``Angular UI`` ones:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:19 +msgid "Once translated, the new language needs to be added to the application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:22 +msgid "Add the files to the client application in :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/locales`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:24 +msgid "Register the new lang in :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/js/CatController.js`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:49 +msgid "To automatically retrieve & update translations files, the script :code:`web-ui/download-from-transifex.sh` can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:55 +msgid "Translating a standard" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/translating.rst:57 +msgid "To translate a standard, see the schema folder (:code:`schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/loc`). Those files are used in the editor and formatters to translate standard elements, to provide help text, recommended values list, ..." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/contributing/writing-documentation.pot b/_build/locale/contributing/writing-documentation.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..328cabf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/contributing/writing-documentation.pot @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:5 +msgid "Writing documentation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:7 +msgid "This section gives some guidelines to write consistent documentation for |project_name|." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:14 +msgid "The quickest and easiest way to contribute to the documentation is to sign up for a `GitHub account `_ and edit the documentation pages (See :repo:`doc`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:20 +msgid "Build the docs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:31 +msgid "Edit the reStructuredText files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:33 +msgid "To update the documentation, use a text editor to edit ``.rst`` files. Save your changes, build the documentation and open the HTML files to preview the changes. When your changes are ready to be submitted to the project, follow the steps in :ref:`making-a-pull-request`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:41 +msgid "Sphinx" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:43 +msgid "This section gives some useful tips about using Sphinx." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:47 +msgid "Don’t introduce any new warnings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:49 +msgid "When building the doc, Sphinx prints out warnings about broken links, syntax errors, ... Don't introduce new ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:53 +msgid "It’s best to delete the build directory and completely rebuild the docs, to check for any warnings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:62 +msgid "Links" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:65 +msgid "Images" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:67 +msgid "Place images in an ``img`` folder in the directory where the rst file is located. Use images with:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:75 +msgid "Code block" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:77 +msgid "Use the following directive to highlight code block:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:87 +msgid "Reference to a section within a file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:89 +msgid "When creating a new page, add a reference on top of the file:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:95 +msgid "This reference could then be used to link to that page or section:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:103 +msgid "Link to GitHub resources" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:105 +msgid "The conf.py contains a set of `external links definition `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:117 +msgid "Example, link to the Bern User Meeting (See :wiki:`Meeting2015Bern`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:121 +msgid "Substitutions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:123 +msgid "`Substitutions `_ are useful to define a value that's needed in many places (eg. the location of a file, etc.)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:127 +msgid "The values are defined in ``rst_epilog`` in conf.py:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:134 +msgid "Use them when appropriate:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:146 +msgid "versionadded, versionchanged and deprecated" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:148 +msgid "Use Sphinx's ``versionadded`` and ``versionchanged`` directives to mark new or changed features. For example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:166 +msgid "When using the ``versionchanged`` directive, a sentence explaining what changed is usually relevant:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:182 +msgid "Use ``deprecated`` directive when a feature is no longer available." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:186 +msgid "seealso" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/contributing/writing-documentation.rst:188 +msgid "Many sections include a list of references to module documentation or external documents. These lists are created using the ``seealso`` directive typically placed in a section just before any subsections." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e8a67ebe --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.pot @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.rst:4 +msgid "Advanced configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.rst:9 +msgid "User session timeout configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.rst:12 +msgid "Default session timeout is set to 35 minutes (See :ref:`user-session`). This timeout can be configured in ``WEB-INF/web.xml`` by changing the value of the session-timeout (time is in minute):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/advanced-configuration.rst:24 +msgid "For developers, the timeout is defined as a build property and can be customized in filters. See :code:`web/src/main/filters/dev.properties#L20`" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/changing-layout.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/changing-layout.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8592969 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/changing-layout.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/changing-layout.rst:5 +msgid "Theming" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/characterset.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/characterset.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e83606b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/characterset.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:4 +msgid "Characterset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:7 +msgid "By default the character set of GeoNetwork is UTF-8. This works well for many locales in the world and is compatible with ASCII that is typically used in US and Canada. However, if UTF-8 is not a compatible characterset in your environment you can change the default." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:11 +msgid "To change it within GeoNetwork simply start the application with the system property geonetwork.file.encoding set to the desired character set name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:13 +msgid "For example if you are running tomcat you can set" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:15 +msgid "JAVA_OPTS=\"-Dgeonetwork.file.encoding=UTF-16\"" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:17 +msgid "to the startup script and the default codec in GeoNetwork will be UTF-16." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:19 +msgid "It is also recommended to set the file.encoding parameter to the same codec as this dictates to the default encoding used in Java and the Web Server may reference at times use the default codec." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/characterset.rst:22 +msgid "Finally, by default the URL parameters are typically interpretted as ASCII characters which can be a problem when searching for metadata that are not in the english language. Each Web Server will have a method for configuring the encoding used when reading the parameters. For example, in Tomcat the encoding/charset configuration is in the server.xml Connector element." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cef120ae --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.pot @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:4 +msgid "Configuring facetted search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:7 +msgid "Facet principle" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:10 +msgid "Faceted search provides a way to easily filter search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:16 +msgid "2 types of facets exist:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:18 +msgid "simple facet (only a list of value)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:20 +msgid "hierarchical facet (a category tree of value) requiring a thesaurus with relations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:25 +msgid "Facet response when searching" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:27 +msgid "When running a search a ``resultType`` parameter define a set of facet to return." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:29 +msgid "A facet response looks like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:57 +msgid "User can retrieve a JSON response by adding ``_content_type=json`` in the parameter list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:62 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:65 +msgid "The facet configuration is done manually in ``WEB-INF/config-summary.xml``. After change, stop the application, drop the index and start the application to fully rebuild the index." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:69 +msgid "A facet is based on a field in the index (see :ref:`configuring-search-fields`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:71 +msgid "Each facet to be indexed is defined in the ``facets`` element. The facets element lists the facets to index and how they should be indexed using attributes on facet elements as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:75 +msgid "name: the name of the facet" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:77 +msgid "indexKey: the name of the indexing field to be used for the facet" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:79 +msgid "label: the label to use for the facet in returned summaries" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:81 +msgid "(optional) classifier: a reference to a spring bean that should be used to determine facet values for the indexing field. Used for hierarchical facets. The bean must implement the org.fao.kernel.search.classifier.Classifier interface Defaults to a classifier which uses the value of the field to be indexed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:86 +msgid "localized: todo documentation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:89 +msgid "eg. for a simple facet" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:98 +msgid "eg. for a hierarchical facet based on a thesaurus." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:100 +msgid "Define the facet" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:110 +msgid "Register the classifier in ``WEB-INF/config-spring-geonetwork.xml``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:122 +msgid "Add the facet to a summary type (see below)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:127 +msgid "How facet summaries should be built and formatted for each summary type is defined in the ``summaryTypes`` element. Create a new facet sets using:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:136 +msgid "The format attribute set to ``DIMENSION`` is the preferred format with a top level dimension tag and category tags for sub-categories which is more suitable for hierarchical facets. It also support one level facets." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:141 +msgid "format ``FACET_NAME`` (still the default) was used for generating facet summary elements using one level only. This mode is not recommended." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:146 +msgid "The ``summaryTypes`` element contains a number of ``summaryType`` elements each of which define a facet summary that can be configured for a service. Each ``summaryType`` element contains a list of facets (``item``) to be returned and how they should be formatted as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:151 +msgid "facet: the name of a facet defined above" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:153 +msgid "(optional) sortBy: the ordering for the facet. Defaults to by count." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:155 +msgid "(optional) sortOrder: asc or desc. Defaults is descendant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:157 +msgid "(optional) max: the number of values to be returned for the facet. Defaults to 10." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:159 +msgid "(optional) depth: the depth to which hierarchical facets should be summarised. Defaults to 1." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:161 +msgid "(optional) translator: Define a DB translator to retrieve label from description tables (eg. categoriesdes) or codelist translator to retrieve label from schema codelists files." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:165 +msgid "eg. for category" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-facetted-search.rst:175 +msgid "or for group" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..869ea9d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.pot @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:4 +msgid "Configuring search fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:6 +msgid "In some cases it's relevant to modify or extend the search fields of the metadata index. For example to add a field (which is then searchable or can be used in a default view) or change the content of the field is created from the metadata (indexation)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:8 +msgid "The amount and type of fields for the whole index is managed in:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:10 +msgid "Next in each schema-plugin you can define how the new field is filled from the metadata content in the file:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:14 +msgid "`Lucene `_ is the search engine used by GeoNetwork. All Lucene configuration is defined in WEB-INF/config-lucene.xml." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:18 +msgid "Add a search field" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:20 +msgid "Indexed fields are defined on a per schema basis on the schema folder (eg. WEB-INF/data/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/index-fields) in default.xsl file. This file define for each search criteria the corresponding element in a metadata record. For example, indexing the title of an ISO19139 record::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:30 +msgid "Usually, if the field is only for searching and should not be displayed in search results the store attribute could be set to false." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:33 +msgid "Once the field added to the index, user could query using it as a search criteria in the different kind of search services. For example using::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:38 +msgid "If user wants this field to be tokenized, it should be added to the tokenized section of config-lucene.xml::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:44 +msgid "If user wants this field to be returned in search results for the search service, then the field should be added to the Lucene configuration in the dumpFields section::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:51 +msgid "Boosting documents and fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:52 +msgid "Document and field boosting allows catalogue administrator to be able to customize default Lucene scoring in order to promote certain types of records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:55 +msgid "A common use case is when the catalogue contains lot of series for aggregating datasets. Not promoting the series could make the series \"useless\" even if those records contains important content. Boosting this type of document allows to promote series and guide the end-user from series to related records (through the relation navigation)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:60 +msgid "In that case, the following configuration allows boosting series and minor importance of records part of a series::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:69 +msgid "The boost is a positive or negative float value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:71 +msgid "This feature has to be used by expert users to alter default search behavior scoring according to catalogue content. It needs tuning and experimentation to not promote too much some records. During testing, if search results looks different while being logged or not, it could be relevant to ignore some internal fields in boost computation which may alter scoring according to current user. Example configuration::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:88 +msgid "Boosting search results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:90 +msgid "By default Lucene compute score according to search criteria and the corresponding result set and the index content. In case of search with no criteria, Lucene will return top docs in index order (because none are more relevant than others)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/configuring-search-fields.rst:95 +msgid "In order to change the score computation, a boost function could be define. Boosting query needs to be loaded in classpath. A sample boosting class is available. RecencyBoostingQuery will promote recently modified documents::" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1730708c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.pot @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:4 +msgid "Customizing metadata views" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:6 +msgid "GeoNetwork facilitates developers to easily change or add a metadata view. A User can change the view to his/her needs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:8 +msgid "By default the initial view is an AngularJS view on the results returned from the search service. Therefore the view can only contain the fields from the Lucene Index. If you require more fields, you can either add fields to the index or don't use the AngularJS view. This view is defined in :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/templates/recordView.html`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:14 +msgid "Metadata views are called 'formatters'. They are located in the schema-plugin related to the metadata that you are formatting. Formatters use either XSLT or Groovy to transform the XML to the required format (html, xml, pdf, json)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:17 +msgid "A formatter can be updated from the web interface in the ``admin console``, ``metadata and templates``, tab 'formatters'. On this page you can upload, change and preview formatters." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/creating-custom-view.rst:25 +msgid "After having created a new formatter you will have to update your application code, so the new formatter-output can be visualised from your application. If the goal of the formatter is to introduce a new html view on metadata, then you can add a reference to it in :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/config.js` (searchSettings.formatter.list)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8cb5875 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.pot @@ -0,0 +1,609 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:4 +msgid "Customizing editor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:10 +msgid "A metadata editor configuration is defined for a specific schema plugin standard (see :ref:`implementing-a-schema-plugin`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:13 +msgid "The editor configuration defined the navigation menu (ie. list of views and tabs) for the editor, the list of fields and the type of control to use. Controls could be HTML type (eg. text, date) or more advanced control build using `AngularJS directive `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:19 +msgid "To build such an editor configuration user needs to know the XSD of the standard to properly build views, tabs and fields according to element names (see :code:`schemas/config-editor.xsd`). Create an editor root element and attach:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:24 +msgid "the schema and" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:26 +msgid "namespaces for the standards" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:42 +msgid "An editor configuration should define first some general element description and then a set of views with at least one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:48 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:181 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:278 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:371 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:667 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:888 +msgid "Child elements:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:50 +msgid "**fields**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-fields`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:52 +msgid "**fieldsWithFieldset**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-fieldsWithFieldset`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:54 +msgid "**multilingualFields**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-multilingualFields`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:56 +msgid "**views**, Mandatory element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-views`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:62 +msgid "Defining field type" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:64 +msgid "Define the form fields type configuration. Default is simple text input. This list contains the list of exception which does not use a simple text input. The list of possible values are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:68 +msgid "all HTML5 input type or" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:70 +msgid "an AngularJS directive name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:73 +msgid "An element can only have one type defined." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:86 +msgid "The other option to define a more advanced field type is to catch the element using and XSL template. This approach is used for keywords in ISO19139 for example (see :code:`schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/layout/layout-custom-fields-keywords.xsl`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:99 +msgid "Grouping element from the standards" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:101 +msgid "List of element to be displayed in a fieldset (ie. boxed element). Those elements usually contain children elements and define major section in the standard. For example, in ISO19139, identification and distribution are major section and should usually be displayed as a group of information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:121 +msgid "Defining multilingual fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:123 +msgid "Configure here the list of multilingual fields for a standard." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:125 +msgid "By default, if the standard as multilingual support like ISO19139, all fields will be displayed as multilingual fields. Define in the exclude section the exception (eg. gmd:identifier for example in ISO19139)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:128 +msgid "Then this section also allows to define how multilingual fields are displayed using the expanded elements. If expanded, then one field per language is displayed with no need to click on the language switcher." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:157 +msgid "Configuring views" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:159 +msgid "At least one view MUST be defined but more view modes can be defined depending on the needs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:161 +msgid "By default ISO19139 define 3 views (ie. default, advanced, xml) and one disabled (ie. INSPIRE). See :code:`schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/layout/config-editor.xml` for the configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:166 +msgid "Another basic example is the Dublin Core view (see :code:`schemas/dublin-core/src/main/plugin/dublin-core/layout/config-editor.xml`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:168 +msgid "To create a new view, use the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:183 +msgid "**view**, One or more (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-view`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:189 +msgid "Defining a view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:191 +msgid "A view has a label and define a specific rendering of the metadata records. A view is composed of one or more tabs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:203 +msgid "The view could be displayed or not according to the metadata record content or the current user session using the displayIfRecord and displayIfServiceInfo attribute." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:209 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:314 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:449 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:589 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:757 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:820 +msgid "Attributes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:211 +msgid "**name** (Mandatory)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:213 +msgid "The key of the view name stored in ``{schema}/loc/{lang}/strings.xml`` or the element name with namespace prefix." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:225 +msgid "**disabled** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:227 +msgid "Hide the view from the menu if the attribute is defined. Allows to easily disable a view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:230 +msgid "**upAndDownControlHidden** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:232 +msgid "Define if up and down control should be displayed in that view. If not defined, controls are displayed. Hide those controls in a view to make it easier with less controls for the end-user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:240 +msgid "**displayIfRecord** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:242 +msgid "XPath expression returning boolean value which will be evaluated against the metadata record. if true the view will be displayed. eg. Display custom-view if metadata standard name contains Medsea:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:254 +msgid "**displayIfServiceInfo** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:256 +msgid "XPath expression returning boolean value which will be evaluate against the service information tree (Jeeves /root/gui element). if true the view will be displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:259 +msgid "eg. Display custom view if user is Administrator:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:266 +msgid "displayIfRecord and displayIfServiceInfo could be combined. An AND operator is used. Both condition MUST returned true for the view to be displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:270 +msgid "**hideTimeInCalendar** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:272 +msgid "Define if calendar control should allows users to set date only or datetime. If attribute is not set, then date and time can be set. This is controlled at the view level, switching to another view may allow more control over the dates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:280 +msgid "**tab**, One or more (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-tab`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:282 +msgid "**flatModeExceptions**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-flatModeExceptions`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:284 +msgid "**thesaurusList**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-thesaurusList`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:290 +msgid "Defining a tab" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:292 +msgid "A view contains at least one tab. In that case it will be the default to display and no top toolbar will be displayed to switch from one tab to another." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:297 +msgid "Add custom view one default tab and a field for the title:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:316 +msgid "**id** (Mandatory)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:318 +msgid "The tab key used in URL parameter to activate that tab. The key is also use for the tab label as defined in ``{schema}/loc/{lang}/strings.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:321 +msgid "**default** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:323 +msgid "Define if this tab is the default one for the view. Only one tab should be the default in a view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:326 +msgid "**toggle** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:328 +msgid "Define if the tab should be displayed in a drop down menu instead of a tab. This is used for advanced section which is not used often by the end-user. More than one tab could be grouped in that drop down tab menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:332 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:459 +msgid "**mode** (Optional) Fixed value: **flat**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:334 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:461 +msgid "The \"flat\" mode is an important concept to understand for the editor. It controls the way:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:336 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:463 +msgid "complex elements are displayed (ie. elements having children) and" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:338 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:465 +msgid "non existing elements are displayed (ie. elements in the standard not in the current document)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:341 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:468 +msgid "When a tab is in flat mode, this tab will not display element which are not in the current metadata document and it will display complex element as a group only if defined in the list of element with fieldset (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-fieldsWithFieldset`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:345 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:472 +msgid "Example for a contact in non \"flat\" mode:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:351 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:478 +msgid "Example for a contact in \"flat\" mode:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:357 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:484 +msgid "This mode makes the layout simpler but does not provide all controls to remove some of the usually boxed element. End-user can still move to the advanced view mode to access those hidden elements in flat mode." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:361 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:488 +msgid "It's recommended to preserve at least one view in non \"flat\" mode for reviewer or administrator in order to be able:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:364 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:491 +msgid "to build proper templates based on the standards" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:366 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:493 +msgid "to fix any types of errors." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:373 +msgid "**section**, Zero or more (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-section`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:378 +msgid "Configuring complex element display" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:380 +msgid "Elements to apply \"flat\" mode exceptions. By default, \"flat\" mode does not display elements containing only children and no value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:400 +msgid "eg. To display gmd:descriptiveKeywords element even if does not exist in the metadata record or if the field should be displayed to add new occurences:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:419 +msgid "Customizing thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:421 +msgid "To configure the type of transformations or the number of keyword allowed for e thesaurus define a specific configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:425 +msgid "eg. only 2 INSPIRE themes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:442 +msgid "Adding a section to a tab" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:444 +msgid "A section is a group of fields." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:451 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:609 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:822 +msgid "**name** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:453 +msgid "An optional name to override the default one base on field name for the section. The name must be defined in ``{schema}/loc/{lang}/strings.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:455 +msgid "**xpath** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:457 +msgid "The xpath of the element to match. If an XPath is set for a section, it should not contains any field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:498 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:502 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:621 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:859 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:863 +msgid "**or** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:500 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:861 +msgid "Local name to match if the element does not exist." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:505 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:624 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:866 +msgid "The local name of the geonet child (ie. non existing element) to match." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:515 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:519 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:634 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:876 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:880 +msgid "**in** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:517 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:878 +msgid "XPath of the geonet:child element with the or name to look for. Usually points to the parent of last element of the XPath attribute." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:521 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:636 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:882 +msgid "The element to search in for the geonet child." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:527 +msgid "Adding a field" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:529 +msgid "To display a simple element use the ``xpath`` attribute to point to the element to display:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:536 +msgid "To override a field label use the ``name`` attribute and define that new label in ``{schema}/loc/{lang}/strings.xml``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:544 +msgid "To display a complex element which exist in the metadata document:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:551 +msgid "In that case all children elements are also displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:555 +msgid "To display a field if exist in the metadata document or providing a add button in case it does not exist (specify ``in`` and ``or`` attribute):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:568 +msgid "Activate the \"flat\" mode at the tab level to make the form display only existing elements:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:591 +msgid "**xpath** (Mandatory)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:593 +msgid "The xpath of the element to match." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:595 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:842 +msgid "**if** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:597 +msgid "An optional xpath expression to evaluate to define if the element should be displayed only in some situation (eg. only for service metadata records). eg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:611 +msgid "A field name to override the default name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:613 +msgid "**isMissingLabel** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:615 +msgid "The label to display if the element does not exist in the metadata record. It indicates that the element is missing in the current record. It could be use for a conformity section saying that the element is \"not evaluated\". EXPERIMENTAL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:638 +msgid "**del** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:641 +msgid "Relative XPath of the element to remove when the remove button is clicked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:643 +msgid "eg. If a template field match linkage and allows editing of field URL, the remove control should remove the parent element gmd:onLine." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:657 +msgid "**templateModeOnly** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:659 +msgid "Define if the template mode should be the only mode used. In that case, the field is always displayed based on the XML template snippet field configuration. Default is false." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:663 +msgid "**notDisplayedIfMissing** (Optional) Fixed value: **true**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:665 +msgid "If the field is found and a geonet child also, the geonet child to add a new one is not displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:669 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:890 +msgid "**template**, Optional element (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor-template`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:675 +msgid "Adding a template based field" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:677 +msgid "A templace configuration for an XML snippet to edit." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:679 +msgid "A template field is compose of an XML snippet corresponding to the element to edit where values to be edited are identified using {{fields}} notation. Each fields needs to be defined as values from which one input field will be created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:681 +msgid "This mode is used to hide the complexity of the XML element to edit. eg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:702 +msgid "The template field mode will only provide editing of part of the snippet element. In some case the snippet may contains more elements than the one edited. In such case, the snippet MUST identified the list of potential elements in order to not to loose information when using this mode. Use the gn:copy element to properly combined the template with the current document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:704 +msgid "eg. The gmd:MD_Identifier may contain a gmd:authority node which needs to be preserved." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:725 +msgid "Adding documentation or help" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:727 +msgid "Insert an HTML fragment in the editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:740 +msgid "The fragment is defined in localization file strings.xml:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:759 +msgid "**ref** (Mandatory)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:761 +msgid "The tag name of the element to insert in the localization file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:766 +msgid "Adding a button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:768 +msgid "A button which trigger an action (usually a process or a add button)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:770 +msgid "Example of a button adding an extent:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:805 +msgid "Example of a button displayed only if there is no resource identifier ending with the metadata record identifier (ie. ``if`` attribute) and running the process with ``add-resource-id`` identifier:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:824 +msgid "TODO" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:826 +msgid "**type** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:828 +msgid "The type of control" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:830 +msgid "**process** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:832 +msgid "The process identifier (eg. add-resource-id)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:834 +msgid "**forceLabel** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:836 +msgid "Force the label to be displayed for this action even if the action is not the first element of its kind. Label with always be displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:845 +msgid "An XPath expression to evaluate. If true, the control is displayed. eg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:855 +msgid "will only displayed the action control if the resource identifier does not end with the metadata identifier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:884 +msgid "**addDirective** (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/editor-ui/creating-custom-editor.rst:886 +msgid "The directive to use for the add control for this field." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47182b8d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.pot @@ -0,0 +1,1501 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:4 +msgid "Implementing schema plugins" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:7 +msgid "Metadata schemas and profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:9 +msgid "A metadata schema describes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:11 +msgid "the names, descriptions and any value codelists of the elements in the metadata schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:12 +msgid "how the elements of the metadata schema are laid out in a metadata document (structure)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:13 +msgid "constraints on elements and content in a metadata document" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:14 +msgid "documentation on how the elements of the metadata schema should be used" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:15 +msgid "sample metadata documents and metadata templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:16 +msgid "scripts to convert metadata documents to and from other metadata schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:18 +msgid "A metadata schema is usually an implementation of a metadata standard." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:20 +msgid "A metadata profile is an adaptation of a metadata schema to suit the needs of a particular community. A metadata profile contains all the components of a metadata schema but may extend, restrict or redefine these components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:26 +msgid "Implementing a metadata schema or profile" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:28 +msgid "There are many ways in which a metadata schema or profile can be implemented. This section will describe the way in which metadata schemas are implemented on https://github.com/geonetwork/schema-plugins or https://github.com/metadata101." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:32 +msgid "Each metadata schema is a maven module implemented as a filesystem tree. The root of the tree is the name of the metadata schema in abbreviated form. The essential components of a metadata schema in the ``src/main/plugin/`` folder and are laid out as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:37 +msgid "**loc** directory with subdirectories for each three letter language code that this information is localized into, with the content in XML files (labels.xml, codelists.xml). For example: ``loc/eng/codelists.xml`` describes the english codelists for metadata elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:41 +msgid "**schema** directory and file named **schema.xsd** providing a single entry point to the XSD hierarchy. For example: ``schema/gmd/gmd.xsd``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:43 +msgid "**schematron** directory has constraints on elements and content in a metadata document implemented using the ISO schematron language" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:45 +msgid "**docs** directory has documentation on how the elements of the metadata schema should be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:47 +msgid "**sample-data** directory has sample metadata documents" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:48 +msgid "**convert** directory has XSLTs that convert metadata documents to and from other schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:51 +msgid "More information on the content of these directories and files will be given in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:56 +msgid "Some schemas on https://github.com/geonetwork/schema-plugins or https://github.com/metadata101 have more information than described above because they have been implemented as GeoNetwork schema plugins." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:63 +msgid "Schema Plugins" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:65 +msgid "A schema plugin that can be used in GeoNetwork is a directory of stylesheets, XML schema descriptions (XSDs) and other information necessary for GeoNetwork to index, view and possibly edit content from XML metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:69 +msgid "To be used in GeoNetwork, a schema directory can be manually placed in the ``schema_plugins`` sub directory of the GeoNetwork data directory. For some schema an additional JAR file should be added to the WEB-INF/lib folder. The default GeoNetwork data directory location is ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/data``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:75 +msgid "The contents of these schemas are parsed during GeoNetwork initialization. If valid, they will be available for use when GeoNetwork starts up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:79 +msgid "Schemas can also added to GeoNetwork dynamically if a zip archive of the schema directory is created and then uploaded to GeoNetwork in one of following ways using functions in the Administration menu:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:83 +msgid "Server file path (specified using file chooser)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:84 +msgid "HTTP URL (eg. http://somehost/somedirectory/iso19139.mcp.zip)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:85 +msgid "As an online resource attached to an ISO19115/19139 metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:88 +msgid "Uploaded schemas are also stored in the ``schema_plugins`` sub directory of the GeoNetwork data directory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:94 +msgid "A template module is available here https://github.com/geonetwork/schema-plugins/tree/develop/iso19139.xyz and is a good example to start with." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:99 +msgid "Contents of a GeoNetwork schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:101 +msgid "When installed, a GeoNetwork schema is a directory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:103 +msgid "The following subdirectories can be present in ``src/main/plugin/``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:105 +msgid "**schema**: (*Optional*) Directory containing the official XSDs of the metadata schema. If the schema is described by a DTD then this directory is optional. Note that schemas described by a DTD cannot be edited by GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:108 +msgid "**schematron**: (*Optional*) Directory containing the schematrons used to check conditions on content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:110 +msgid "**docs**: (*Optional*) Documentation about the schema" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:111 +msgid "**index-fields**: (*Mandatory*) Directory of XSLT required to index metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:112 +msgid "**loc**: (*Mandatory*) Directory of localized information: labels, codelists or schema specific strings. Eg. ``loc/eng/codelists.xml``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:114 +msgid "**convert**: (*Mandatory*) Directory of XSLTs to convert metadata from or to this schema. This could be to convert metadata to other schemas or to convert metadata from other schemas and formats to this schema. Eg. ``convert/oai_dc.xsl``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:118 +msgid "**layout**: (*Mandatory for version 3.x*) contains configuration for presenting metadata in the editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:120 +msgid "**formatter**: (*Optional for version 3.x*) contains configuration for presenting metadata using Groovy or XSLT formatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:122 +msgid "**present**: (*Mandatory for version 2.x*) contains XSLTs for presenting metadata in the viewer/editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:124 +msgid "**present/csw**: (*Mandatory*) contains XSLTs for response to CSW requests for brief, summary and full records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:126 +msgid "**process**: (*Optional*) contains XSLTs for processing metadata elements by metadata suggestions mechanism (see **suggest.xsl** below)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:128 +msgid "**sample-data**: (*Optional*) Sample metadata for this schema. The metadata samples are in MEF format so that samples can have thumbnails or browse graphics as well as online resources." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:131 +msgid "**templates**: (*Optional*) Directory containing template and subtemplate metadata records for this schema. Template metadata records are usually metadata records with the set of elements (and content) that will be used for a specific purpose. Eg. iso19139.mcp schema has a 'Minimum Element' template that has the mandatory elements for the schema and a example of the content that is expected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:139 +msgid "The following stylesheets can be present:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:141 +msgid "**extract-date-modified.xsl**: (*Mandatory*) Extract the date of modification from the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:143 +msgid "**extract-gml.xsl**: (*Mandatory*) Extract the spatial extent from the metadata record as a GML GeometryCollection element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:145 +msgid "**extract-thumbnails.xsl**: (*Optional*) Extract the browse graphic/thumbnail from the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:147 +msgid "**extract-uuid.xsl**: (*Mandatory*) Extract the UUID of the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:148 +msgid "**extract-relations.xsl**: (*Optional*) Extract the associated resources of the metadata record (eg. online source, thumbnails)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:150 +msgid "**set-thumbnail.xsl**: (*Optional*) Set the browse graphic/thumbnail in the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:152 +msgid "**set-uuid.xsl**: (*Optional*) Set the UUID of the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:153 +msgid "**suggest.xsl**: (*Optional*) XSLT run by metadata suggestions service. The XSLT contains processes that can be registered and run on different elements of a metadata record. eg. expand keyword field with comma separated content into multiple keyword fields. See :ref:`metadata_suggestion` for more info." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:158 +msgid "**unset-thumbnail.xsl**: (*Optional*) Remove the browse graphic/thumbnail from the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:160 +msgid "**update-child-from-parent-info.xsl**: (*Optional*) XSLT to specify which elements in a child record are updated from a parent record. Used to manage hierarchical relationships between metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:163 +msgid "**update-fixed-info.xsl**: (*Optional*) XSLT to update 'fixed' content in metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:166 +msgid "The following configuration files can be present:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:168 +msgid "**oasis-catalog.xml**: (*Optional*) An oasis catalog describing any mappings that should be used for this schema eg. mapping URLs to local copies such as schemaLocations eg. http://www.isotc211.org/2005/gmd/gmd.xsd is mapped to ``schema/gmd/gmd.xsd``. Path names used in the oasis catalog are relative to the location of this file which is the schema directory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:173 +msgid "**schema.xsd**: (*Optional*) XML schema directory file that includes the XSDs used by this metadata schema. If the schema uses a DTD then this file should not be present. Metadata records from schemas that use DTDs cannot be edited in GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:176 +msgid "**schema-conversions.xml**: (*Optional*) XML file that describes the converters that can be applied to records belonging to this schema. This information is used to show these conversions as options for the user to choose when a metadata record belonging to this schema is shown in the search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:180 +msgid "**schema-ident.xml**: (*Mandatory*) XML file that contains the schema name, identifier, version number and details on how to recognise metadata records that belong to this schema. This file has an XML schema definition in ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xml/validation/schemaPlugins/schema-ident.xsd`` which is used to validate it when the schema is loaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:185 +msgid "**schema-substitutes.xml**: (*Optional*) XML file that redefines the set of elements that can be used as substitutes for a specific element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:187 +msgid "**schema-suggestions.xml**: (*Optional*) XML file that tells the editor which child elements of a complex element to automatically expand in the editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:191 +msgid "In the ``index-fields`` folder, the following files are required:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:193 +msgid "**default.xsl**: (*Mandatory*) Index the metadata record content in Lucene. Creates the Lucene document used by GeoNetwork to index the metadata record content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:195 +msgid "**language-default.xsl**: (*Optional*) Required to index multilingual metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:199 +msgid "To help in understanding what each of these components is and what is required, we will now give a step-by-step example of how to build a schemaPlugin for GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:205 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:207 +msgid "In order to create a schema plugin for GeoNetwork, you should check out the source code:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:215 +msgid "Then you could check out the schema plugin repository containing examples:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:223 +msgid "To work with the example shown here, you should create your new schema plugin in a subdirectory of the schemas maven module (see :code:`schemas`). The ``iso19139.xyz`` plugin from the schema plugin repository could be a good start." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:228 +msgid "Once created, you need to register your new plugin in the build of the application. To do this:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:231 +msgid "Add the plugin as a module of the schemas module (see :code:`schemas/pom.xml`):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:237 +msgid "Register the plugin in the webapp in the ``copy-schemas`` execution (see :code:`web/pom.xml`):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:247 +msgid "Optionally register the dependency if you plugin implement custom Java (see :code:`web/pom.xml`):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:260 +msgid "Example - ISO19115/19139 Marine Community Profile (MCP)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:262 +msgid "The Marine Community Profile (MCP) is a profile of ISO19115/19139 developed for and with the Marine Community. The profile extends the ISO19115 metadata standard and is implemented using an extension of the XML implementation of ISO19115 described in ISO19139. Both the ISO19115 metadata standard and its XML implementation, ISO19139, are available through ISO distribution channels." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:268 +msgid "The documentation for the Marine Community Profile can be found at http://www.aodc.gov.au/files/MarineCommunityProfilev1.4.pdf. The implementation of the Marine Community Profile as XML schema definitions is based on the approach described at https://www.seegrid.csiro.au/wiki/AppSchemas/MetadataProfiles. The XML schema definitions (XSDs) are available at the URL http://bluenet3.antcrc.utas.edu.au/mcp-1.4." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:274 +msgid "Looking at the XML schema definitions, the profile adds a few new elements to the base ISO19139 standard. So the basic idea in defining a plugin Marine Community Profile schema for GeoNetwork is to use as much of the basic ISO19139 schema definition supplied with GeoNetwork as possible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:279 +msgid "We'll now describe in basic steps how to create each of the components of a plugin schema for GeoNetwork that implements the MCP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:283 +msgid "Creating the schema-ident.xml file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:285 +msgid "Now we need to provide the information necessary to identify the schema and metadata records that belong to the schema. The schema-ident.xml file for the MCP is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:327 +msgid "Each of the elements is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:329 +msgid "**name** - the name by which the schema will be known in GeoNetwork. If the schema is a profile of a base schema already added to GeoNetwork then the convention is to call the schema .." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:332 +msgid "**id** - a unique identifier for the schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:333 +msgid "**version** - the version number of the schema. Multiple versions of the schema can be present in GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:335 +msgid "**schemaLocation** - a set of pairs, where the first member of the pair is a namespace URI and the second member is the official URL of the XSD. The contents of this element will be added to the root element of any metadata record displayed by GeoNetwork as a schemaLocation/noNamespaceSchemaLocation attribute, if such as attribute does not already exist. It will also be used whenever an official schemaLocation/noNamespaceSchemaLocation is required (eg. in response to a ListMetadataFormats OAI request)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:342 +msgid "**autodetect** - contains elements or attributes (with content) that must be present in any metadata record that belongs to this schema. This is used during schema detection whenever GeoNetwork receives a metadata record of unknown schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:346 +msgid "**filters** - (Optional) contains custom filter to be applied based on user privileges" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:349 +msgid "After creating this file you can validate it manually using the XML schema definition (XSD) in ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xml/validation/schemaPlugins/schema-ident.xsd``. This XSD is also used to validate this file when the schema is loaded. If schema-ident.xml failes validation, the schema will not be loaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:357 +msgid "More on autodetect" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:359 +msgid "The autodetect section of schema-ident.xml is used when GeoNetwork needs to identify which metadata schema a record belongs to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:362 +msgid "The five rules that can be used in this section in order of evaluation are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:364 +msgid "**1. Attributes** - Find one or more attributes and/or namespaces in the document. An example use case is a profile of ISO19115/19139 that adds optional elements under a new namespace to gmd:identificationInfo/gmd:MD_DataIdentification. To detect records that belong to this profile the autodetect section in the schema-ident.xml file could look something like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:378 +msgid "Some other points about attributes autodetect:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:380 +msgid "multiple attributes can be specified - all must be match for the record to be recognized as belonging to this schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:382 +msgid "if the attributes have a namespace then the namespace should be specified on the autodetect element or somewhere in the schema-ident.xml document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:385 +msgid "**2. Elements** - Find one or more elements in the document. An example use case is the one shown in the example schema-ident.xml file earlier:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:410 +msgid "Some other points about elements autodetect:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:412 +msgid "multiple elements can be specified - eg. as in the above, both metadataStandardName and metadataStandardVersion have been specified - all must be match for the record to be recognized as belonging to this schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:415 +msgid "multiple values for the elements can be specified. eg. as in the above, a match for gmd:metadataStandardVersion will be found for ``1.5-experimental`` OR ``MCP:BlueNet V1.5-experimental`` OR ``MCP:BlueNet V1.5`` - the vertical line or pipe character '|' is used to separate the options here. Regular expression can be used also." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:420 +msgid "if the elements have a namespace then the namespace(s) should be specified on the autodetect element or somewhere in the schema-ident.xml document before the element in which they are used - eg. in the above there are there namespace declarations on the autodetect element so as not to clutter the content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:426 +msgid "**3. Root element** - root element of the document must match. An example use case is the one used for the eml-gbif schema. Documents belonging to this schema always have root element of eml:eml so the autodetect section for this schema is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:439 +msgid "Some other points about root element autodetect:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:441 +msgid "multiple elements can be specified - any element in the set that matches the root element of the record will trigger a match." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:443 +msgid "if the elements have a namespace then the namespace(s) should be specified on the autodetect element or somewhere in the schema-ident.xml document before the element that uses them - eg. as in the above there is a namespace declaration on the autodetect element for clarity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:448 +msgid "**4. Namespaces** - Find one or more namespaces in the document. An example use case is the one used for the csw:Record schema. Records belonging to the csw:Record schema can have three possible root elements: csw:Record, csw:SummaryRecord and csw:BriefRecord, but instead of using a multiple element root autodetect, we could use the common csw namespace for autodetect as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:461 +msgid "Some other points about namespaces autodetect:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:463 +msgid "multiple namespaces can be specified - all must be present for the record to be recognized as belonging to this schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:465 +msgid "the prefix is ignored. A namespace match occurs if the namespace URI found in the record matches the namespace URI specified in the namespaces autodetect element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:469 +msgid "**5. Default schema** - This is the fail-safe provision for records that don't match any of the installed schemas. The value for the default schema is specified in the appHandler configuration of the ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/config.xml`` config file or it could be a default specified by the operation calling autodetect (eg. a value parsed from a user bulk loading some metadata records). For flexibility and accuracy reasons it is preferable that records be detected using the autodetect information of an installed schema. The default schema is just a 'catch all' method of assigning records to a specific schema. The config element in ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/config.xml`` looks like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:491 +msgid "More on autodetect evaluation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:493 +msgid "The rules for autodetect are evaluated as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:518 +msgid "As an example, suppose we have three schemas iso19139.mcp, iso19139.mcp-1.4 and iso19139.mcp-cmar with the following autodetect elements:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:521 +msgid "**iso19139.mcp-1.4:**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:541 +msgid "**iso19139.mcp-cmar:**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:549 +msgid "**iso19139.mcp:**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:559 +msgid "A record going through autodetect processing (eg. on import) would be checked against:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:561 +msgid "iso19139.mcp-cmar first as it has an 'attributes' rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:562 +msgid "then iso19139.mcp-1.4 as it has an 'elements' rules" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:563 +msgid "then finally against iso19139.mcp, as it has a 'root element' rule." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:565 +msgid "The idea behind this processing algorithm is that base schemas will use a 'root element' rule (or the more difficult to control 'namespaces' rule) and profiles will use a finer or more specific rule such as 'attributes' or 'elements'." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:572 +msgid "More on filters" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:574 +msgid "The goal is to add the capability to configure the download and dynamic operation based on the catalog content where they could have different meanings depending :" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:577 +msgid "on the schema (eg. URL to a file for download is not located at the same place for dublin core and ISO19139)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:579 +msgid "on the record encoding rules (eg. download could be WFS links and not only uploaded file)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:581 +msgid "Filter configuration for each type of operation is defined in schema-ident.xml in the filters section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:584 +msgid "A filter define:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:586 +msgid "an operation (which match canEdit, canDownload, canDynamic method in AccessManager)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:588 +msgid "an XPath to select elements to filter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:589 +msgid "an optional element definition to substitute the replaced element by (if a match is found this element attributes or children are inserted). This is used to highlight removed element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:611 +msgid "The filters are applied in XMLSerializer according to user privileges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:616 +msgid "After setting up schema-ident.xml, our new GeoNetwork plugin schema for MCP contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:625 +msgid "Creating the schema-conversions.xml file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:627 +msgid "This file describes the converters that can be applied to metadata records that belong to the schema. Each converter must be manually defined as a GeoNetwork (Jeeves) service that can be called to transform a particular metadata record to a different schema. The schema-conversions.xml file for the MCP is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:654 +msgid "Each converter has the following attributes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:656 +msgid "**name** - the name of the converter. This is the service name of the GeoNetwork (Jeeves) service and should be unique (prefixing the service name with xml_ is a good way to make this name unique)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:659 +msgid "**nsUri** - the primary namespace of the schema produced by the converter. eg. xml_iso19139.mcpTorifcs transforms metadata records from iso19139.mcp to the RIFCS schema. Metadata records in the RIFCS metadata schema have primary namespace URI of http://ands.org.au/standards/rif-cs/registryObjects." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:663 +msgid "**schemaLocation** - the location (URL) of the XML schema definition (XSD) corresponding to the nsURI." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:665 +msgid "**xslt** - the name of the XSLT that actually carries out the transformation. This XSLT should be located in the convert subdirectory of the schema plugin." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:669 +msgid "After setting up schema-conversions.xml, our new GeoNetwork plugin schema for MCP contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:675 +msgid "::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:672 +msgid "schema-conversions.xml schema-ident.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:680 +msgid "Creating the schema directory and schema.xsd file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:682 +msgid "The schema and schema.xsd components are used by the GeoNetwork editor and validation functions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:685 +msgid "GeoNetwork's editor uses the XSDs to build a form that will not only order the elements in a metadata document correctly but also offer options to create any elements that are not in the metadata document. The idea behind this approach is twofold. Firstly, the editor can use the XML schema definition rules to help the user avoid creating a document that is structurally incorrect eg. missing mandatory elements or elements not ordered correctly. Secondly, the same editor code can be used on any XML metadata document with a defined XSD." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:693 +msgid "If you are defining your own metadata schema then you can create an XML schema document using the XSD language. The elements of the language can be found online at http://www.w3schools.com/schema/ or you can refer to a textbook such as Priscilla Walmsley's Definitive XML Schema (Prentice Hall, 2002). GeoNetwork's XML schema parsing code understands almost all of the XSD language with the exception of redefine, any and anyAttribute (although the last two can be handled under special circumstances)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:701 +msgid "In the case of the Marine Commuity Profile, we are basically defining a number of extensions to the base standard ISO19115/19139. These extensions are defined using the XSD extension mechanism on the types defined in ISO19139. The following snippet shows how the Marine Community Profile extends the gmd:MD_Metadata element to add a new element called revisionDate:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:736 +msgid "In short, we have defined a new element mcp:MD_Metadata with type mcp:MD_Metadata_Type, which is an extension of gmd:MD_Metadata_Type. By extension, we mean that the new type includes all of the elements of the old type plus one new element, mcp:revisionDate. A mandatory attribute (gco:isoType) is also attached to mcp:MD_Metadata with a fixed value set to the name of the element that we extended (gmd:MD_Metadata)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:743 +msgid "By defining the profile in this way, it is not necessary to modify the underlying ISO19139 schemas. So the schema directory for the MCP essentially consists of the extensions plus the base ISO19139 schemas. One possible directory structure is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:753 +msgid "The extensions directory contains a single file mcpExtensions.xsd, which imports the gmd namespace. The remaining directories are the ISO19139 base schemas." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:757 +msgid "The schema.xsd file, which is the file GeoNetwork looks for, will import the mcpExtensions.xsd file and any other namespaces not imported as part of the base ISO19139 schema. It is shown as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:779 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:878 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1614 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1636 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1709 +msgid "At this stage, our new GeoNetwork plugin schema for MCP contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:787 +msgid "Creating the extract-... XSLTs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:789 +msgid "GeoNetwork needs to extract certain information from a metadata record and translate it into a common, simplified XML structure that is independent of the metadata schema. Rather than do this with Java coded XPaths, XSLTs are used to process the XML and return the common, simplified XML structure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:794 +msgid "The three xslts we'll create are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:796 +msgid "**extract-date-modified.xsl** - this XSLT processes the metadata record and extracts the date the metadata record was last modified. For the MCP, this information is held in the mcp:revisionDate element which is a child of mcp:MD_Metadata. The easiest way to create this for MCP is to copy extract-date-modified.xsl from the iso19139 schema and modify it to suit the MCP namespace and to use mcp:revisionDate in place of gmd:dateStamp." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:802 +msgid "**extract-gml.xsl** - this XSLT processes the metadata record and extracts the spatial extent as a gml GeometryCollection element. The gml is passed to geotools for insertion into the spatial index (either a shapefile or a spatial database). For ISO19115/19139 and profiles, this task is quite easy because spatial extents (apart from the bounding box) are encoded as gml in the metadata record. Again, the easiest way to create this for the MCP is to copy extract-gml.xsd from the iso19139 schema ad modify it to suit the MCP namespace." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:811 +msgid "An example bounding box fragment from an MCP metadata record is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:836 +msgid "Running extract-gml.xsl on the metadata record that contains this XML will produce:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:852 +msgid "If there is more than one extent in the metadata record, then they should also appear in this gml:GeometryCollection element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:855 +msgid "To find out more about gml, see Lake, Burggraf, Trninic and Rae, \"GML Geography Mark-Up Language, Foundation for the Geo-Web\", Wiley, 2004." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:858 +msgid "Finally, a note on projections. It is possible to have bounding polygons in an MCP record in a projection other than EPSG:4326. GeoNetwork transforms all projections known to GeoTools (and encoded in a form that GeoTools understands) to EPSG:4326 when writing the spatial extents to the shapefile or spatial database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:864 +msgid "**extract-uuid.xsl** - this XSLT processes the metadata record and extracts the identifier for the record. For the MCP and base ISO standard, this information is held in the gmd:fileIdentifier element which is a child of mcp:MD_Metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:869 +msgid "These xslts can be tested by running them on a metadata record from the schema. You should use the saxon xslt processor. For example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:887 +msgid "Creating the localized strings in the loc directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:889 +msgid "The loc directory contains localized strings specific to this schema, arranged by language abbreviation in sub-directories." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:892 +msgid "You should provide localized strings in whatever languages you expect your schema to be used in." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:895 +msgid "Localized strings for this schema can be used in the presentation xslts and schematron error messages. For the presentation xslts:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:898 +msgid "codelists for controlled vocabulary fields should be in loc//codelists.xml eg. ``loc/eng/codelists.xml``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:900 +msgid "label strings that replace XML element names with more intelligible/alternative phrases and rollover help strings should be in loc//labels.xml eg. ``loc/eng/labels.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:903 +msgid "all other localized strings should be in loc//strings.xml eg. ``loc/eng/strings.xml``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:906 +msgid "Note that because the MCP is a profile of ISO19115/19139 and we have followed the GeoNetwork naming convention for profiles, we need only include the labels and codelists that are specific to the MCP or that we want to override. Other labels and codelists will be retrieved from the base schema iso19139." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:913 +msgid "More on codelists.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:915 +msgid "Typically codelists are generated from enumerated lists in the metadata schema XSDs such as the following from http://www.isotc211.org/2005/gmd/identification.xsd for gmd:MD_TopicCategoryCode in the iso19139 schema:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:949 +msgid "The following is part of the codelists.xml entry manually created for this element:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:981 +msgid "The codelists.xml file maps the enumerated values from the XSD to a localized label and a description via the code element." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:984 +msgid "A localized copy of codelists.xml is made available on an XPath to the presentation XSLTs eg. /root/gui/schemas/iso19139/codelist for the iso19139 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:988 +msgid "The XSLT metadata.xsl which contains templates used by all metadata schema presentation XSLTs, handles the creation of a select list/drop down menu in the editor and display of the code and description in the metadata viewer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:992 +msgid "The iso19139 schema has additional codelists that are managed external to the XSDs in catalog/vocabulary files such as http://www.isotc211.org/2005/resources/Codelist/gmxCodelists.xml These have also been added to the codelists.xml file so that they can be localized, overridden in profiles and include an extended description to provide more useful information when viewing the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:999 +msgid "The iso19139 schema has additional templates in its presentation xslts to handlese codelists because they are specific to that schema. These are discussed in the section on presentation XSLTs later in this manual." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1004 +msgid "More on labels.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1006 +msgid "A localized copy of labels.xml is made available on an XPath to the presentation XSLTs eg. /root/gui/schemas/iso19139/labels for the iso19139 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1009 +msgid "The ``labels.xml`` file can also be used to provide helper values in the form of a drop down/select list for free text fields. As an example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1024 +msgid "This would result in the Editor (through the XSLT metadata.xsl) displaying the credit field with these helper options listed beside it in a drop down/select menu something like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1032 +msgid "More on strings.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1034 +msgid "A localized copy of ``strings.xml`` is made available on an XPath to the presentation XSLTs eg. /root/gui/schemas/iso19139/strings for the iso19139 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1037 +msgid "After adding the localized strings, our new GeoNetwork plugin schema for MCP contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1047 +msgid "Creating the presentations using formatter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1051 +msgid "See formatter section TODO for version 3.x" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1054 +msgid "Customizing the editor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1058 +msgid "See editor configuration section TODO for version 3.x" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1062 +msgid "Creating the presentations XSLTs in the present directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1067 +msgid "Each metadata schema should contain XSLTs that display and possibly edit metadata records that belong to the schema. These XSLTs are held in the ``present`` directory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1070 +msgid "To be be used in the XSLT include/import hierarchy these XSLTs must follow a naming convention: metadata-.xsl. So for example, the presentation xslt for the iso19139 schema is ``metadata-iso19139.xsl``. For the MCP, since our schema name is iso19139.mcp, the presentation XSLT would be called ``metadata-iso19193.mcp.xsl``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1076 +msgid "Any XSLTs included by the presentation XSLT should also be in the present directory (this is a convention for clarity - it is not mandatory as include/import URLs can be mapped in the oasis-catalog.xml for the schema to other locations)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1081 +msgid "There are certain XSLT templates that the presentation XSLT must have:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1083 +msgid "the **main** template, which must be called: metadata-. For the MCP profile of iso19139 the main template would look like the following (taken from metadata-iso19139.mcp.xsl):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1101 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1240 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1319 +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1462 +msgid "Analyzing this template:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1103 +msgid "The name=\"metadata-iso19139.mcp\" is used by the main element processing template in metadata.xsl: elementEP. The main metadata services, show and edit, end up calling metadata-show.xsl and metadata-edit.xsl respectively with the metadata record passed from the Java service. Both these XSLTs, process the metadata record by applying the elementEP template from metadata.xsl to the root element. The elementEP template calls this main schema template using the schema name iso19139.mcp." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1107 +msgid "The job of this main template is set to process all the elements of the metadata record using templates declared with a mode name that matches the schema name or the name of the base schema (in this case iso19139). This modal processing is to ensure that only templates intended to process metadata elements from this schema or the base schema are applied. The reason for this is that almost all profiles change or add a small number of elements to those in the base schema. So most of the metadata elements in a profile can be processed in the mode of the base schema. We'll see later in this section how to override processing of an element in the base schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1117 +msgid "a **completeTab** template, which must be called: CompleteTab. This template will display all tabs, apart from the 'default' (or simple mode) and the 'XML View' tabs, in the left hand frame of the editor/viewer screen. Here is an example for the MCP:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1160 +msgid "This template is called by the template named \"tab\" (which also adds the \"default\" and \"XML View\" tabs) in ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xsl/metadata-tab-utils.xsl`` using the schema name. That XSLT also has the code for the \"displayTab\" template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1164 +msgid "'mcpMinimum', 'mcpCore', 'complete' etc are the names of the tabs. The name of the current or active tab is stored in the global variable \"currTab\" available to all presentation XSLTs. Logic to decide what to display when a particular tab is active should be contained in the root element processing tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1169 +msgid "a **root element** processing tab. This tab should match on the root element of the metadata record. For example, for the iso19139 schema:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1201 +msgid "This template is basically a very long \"choose\" statement with \"when\" clauses that test the value of the currently defined tab (in global variable currTab). Each \"when\" clause will display the set of metadata elements that correspond to the tab definition using \"elementEP\" directly (as in the \"when\" clause for the 'identification' tab above) or via a named template (as in the 'metadata' tab above). For the MCP our template is similar to the one above for iso19139, except that the match would be on \"mcp:MD_Metadata\" (and the processing mode may differ - see the section 'An alternative XSLT design for profiles' below for more details)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1211 +msgid "a **brief** template, which must be called: Brief. This template processes the metadata record and extracts from it a format neutral summary of the metadata for purposes such as displaying the search results. Here is an example for the eml-gbif schema (because it is fairly short!):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1242 +msgid "The template matches on an element eml-gbifBrief, created by the mode=\"brief\" template in metadata-utils.xsl. The metadata record will be the first child in the /metadata XPath." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1245 +msgid "Then process metadata elements to produce a flat XML structure that is used by search-results-xhtml.xsl to display a summary of the metadata record found by a search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1249 +msgid "Once again, for profiles of an existing schema, it makes sense to use a slighlty different approach so that the profile need not duplicate templates. Here is an example from metadata-iso19139.mcp.xsl:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1266 +msgid "This template splits the processing between the base iso19139 schema and a brief template that handles elements specific to the profile. This assumes that:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1270 +msgid "The base schema has separated the element from the remainder of its brief processing so that it can be called by profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1272 +msgid "The profile includes links to equivalent elements that can be used by the base schema to process common elements eg. for ISO19139, elements in the profile have gco:isoType attributes that give the name of the base element and can be used in XPath matches such as \"gmd:MD_DataIdentification|*[@gco:isoType='gmd:MD_DataIdentification']\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1278 +msgid "templates that match on elements specific to the schema. Here is an example from the eml-gbif schema:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1321 +msgid "In view mode the individual keywords from the set are concatenated into a comma separated string with the name of the thesaurus in brackets at the end." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1324 +msgid "In edit mode, the keywordSet is handled as a complex element ie. the user can add individual keyword elements with content and a single thesaurus name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1326 +msgid "This is an example of the type of processing that can be done on an element in a metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1329 +msgid "For profiles, templates for elements can be defined in the same way except that the template will process in the mode of the base schema. Here is an example showing the first few lines of a template for processing the mcp:revisionDate element:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1349 +msgid "If a template for a profile is intended to override a template in the base schema, then the template can be defined in the presentation XSLT for the profile with a priority attribute set to a high number and an XPath condition that ensures the template is processed for the profile only. For example in the MCP, we can override the handling of gmd:EX_GeographicBoundingBox in metadata-iso19139.xsl by defining a template in metadata-iso19139.mcp.xsl as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1364 +msgid "Finally, a profile may also extend some of the existing codelists in the base schema. These extended codelists should be held in a localized codelists.xml. As an example, in iso19139 these codelists are often attached to elements like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1375 +msgid "Templates for handling these elements are in the iso19139 presentation XSLT ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/schema_plugins/iso19139/present/metadata-iso19139.xsl``. These templates use the name of the element (eg. gmd:CI_RoleCode) and the codelist XPath (eg. /root/gui/schemas/iso19139/codelists) to build select list/drop down menus when editing and to display a full description when viewing. See templates near the template named 'iso19139Codelist'. These templates can handle the extended codelists for any profile because they:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1383 +msgid "match on any element that has a child element with attribute codeList" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1384 +msgid "use the schema name in the codelists XPath" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1385 +msgid "fall back to the base iso19139 schema if the profile codelist doesn't have the required codelist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1388 +msgid "However, if you don't need localized codelists, it is often easier and more direct to extract codelists directly from the ``gmxCodelists.xml`` file. This is in fact the solution that has been adopted for the MCP. The ``gmxCodelists.xml`` file is included in the presentation xslt for the MCP using a statement like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1400 +msgid "Check the codelist handling templates in ``metadata-iso19139.mcp.xsl`` to see how this works." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1403 +msgid "An alternative XSLT design for profiles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1405 +msgid "In all powerful languages there will be more than one way to achieve a particular goal. This alternative XSLT design is for processing profiles. The idea behind the alternative is based on the following observations about the GeoNetwork XSLTs:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1410 +msgid "All elements are initially processed by apply-templates in mode \"elementEP\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1411 +msgid "The template \"elementEP\" (see ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xsl/metadata.xsl``) eventually calls the **main** template of the schema/profile." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1413 +msgid "The main template can initially process the element in a mode particular to the profile and if this is not successful (ie. no template matches and thus no HTML elements are returned), process the element in the mode of the base schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1418 +msgid "The advantage of this design is that overriding a template for an element in the base schema does not need the priority attribute or an XPath condition check on the schema name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1422 +msgid "Here is an example for the MCP (iso19139.mcp) with base schema iso19139:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1424 +msgid "the **main** template, which must be called: metadata-iso19139.mcp.xsl:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1464 +msgid "The name=\"metadata-iso19139.mcp\" is used by the main element processing template in metadata.xsl: elementEP. The main metadata services, show and edit, end up calling metadata-show.xsl and metadata-edit.xsl respectively with the metadata record passed from the Java service. Both these XSLTs, process the metadata record by applying the elementEP template from metadata.xsl to the root element. elementEP calls the appropriate main schema template using the schema name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1471 +msgid "The job of this main template is set to process all the elements of the metadata profile. The processing takes place in one of two modes. Firstly, the element is processed in the profile mode (iso19139.mcp). If a match is found then HTML elements will be returned and copied to the output document. If no HTML elements are returned then the element is processed in the base schema mode, iso19139." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1478 +msgid "templates that match on elements specific to the profile have mode iso19139.mcp:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1490 +msgid "templates that override elements in the base schema are processed in the profile mode iso19139.mcp" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1503 +msgid "Notice that the template header of the profile has a simpler design than that used for the original design? Neither the priority attribute or the schema XPath condition is required because we are using a different mode to the base schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1508 +msgid "To support processing in two modes we need to add a null template to the profile mode iso19139.mcp as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1517 +msgid "This template will match all elements that we don't have a specific template for in the profile mode iso19139.mcp. These elements will be processed in the base schema mode iso19139 instead because the null template returns nothing (see the main template discussion above)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1522 +msgid "The remainder of the discussion in the original design relating to tabs etc applies to the alternative design and is not repeated here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1527 +msgid "CSW Presentation XSLTs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1529 +msgid "The CSW server can be asked to provide records in a number of output schemas. The two supported by GeoNetwork are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1532 +msgid "**ogc** - http://www.opengis.net/cat/csw/2.0.2 - a dublin core derivative" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1533 +msgid "**iso** - http://www.isotc211.org/2005/gmd - ISO19115/19139" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1535 +msgid "From each of these output schemas, a **brief**, **summary** or **full** element set can be requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1538 +msgid "These output schemas and element sets are implemented in GeoNetwork as XSLTs and they are stored in the 'csw' subdirectory of the 'present' directory. The ogc output schema XSLTs are implemented as ogc-brief.xsl, ogc-summary and ogc-full.xsl. The iso output schema XSLTs are implemented as iso-brief.xsl, iso-summary.xsl and iso-full.xsl." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1544 +msgid "To create these XSLTs for the MCP, the best option is to copy and modify the csw presentation XSLTs from the base schema iso19139." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1547 +msgid "After creating the presentation XSLTs, our new GeoNetwork plugin schema for MCP contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1558 +msgid "Creating the index-fields.xsl to index content from the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1560 +msgid "This XSLT indexes the content of elements in the metadata record. The essence of this XSLT is to select elements from the metadata record and map them to lucene index field names. The lucene index field names used in GeoNetwork are as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1566 +msgid "Lucene Index Field Name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1566 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1568 +msgid "abstract" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1568 +msgid "Metadata abstract" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1569 +msgid "any" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1569 +msgid "Content from all metadata elements (for free text)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1570 +msgid "changeDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1570 +msgid "Date that the metadata record was modified" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1571 +msgid "createDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1571 +msgid "Date that the metadata record was created" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1572 +msgid "denominator" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1572 +msgid "Scale denominator in data resolution" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1573 +msgid "download" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1573 +msgid "Does the metadata record have a downloadable resource attached? (0 or 1)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1574 +msgid "digital" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1574 +msgid "Is the metadata record distributed/available in a digital format? (0 or 1)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1575 +msgid "eastBL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1575 +msgid "East bounding box longitude" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1576 +msgid "keyword" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1576 +msgid "Metadata keywords" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1577 +msgid "metadataStandardName" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1577 +msgid "Metadata standard name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1578 +msgid "northBL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1578 +msgid "North bounding box latitude" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1579 +msgid "operatesOn" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1579 +msgid "Uuid of metadata record describing dataset that is operated on by a service" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1580 +msgid "orgName" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1580 +msgid "Name of organisation listed in point-of-contact information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1581 +msgid "parentUuid" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1581 +msgid "Uuid of parent metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1582 +msgid "paper" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1582 +msgid "Is the metadata record distributed/available in a paper format? (0 or 1)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1583 +msgid "protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1583 +msgid "On line resource access protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1584 +msgid "publicationDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1584 +msgid "Date resource was published" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1585 +msgid "southBL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1585 +msgid "South bounding box latitude" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1586 +msgid "spatialRepresentationType" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1586 +msgid "vector, raster, etc" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1587 +msgid "tempExtentBegin" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1587 +msgid "Beginning of temporal extent range" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1588 +msgid "tempExtentEnd" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1588 +msgid "End of temporal extent range" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1589 +msgid "title" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1589 +msgid "Metadata title" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1590 +msgid "topicCat" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1590 +msgid "Metadata topic category" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1591 +msgid "type" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1591 +msgid "Metadata hierarchy level (should be dataset if unknown)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1592 +msgid "westBL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1592 +msgid "West bounding box longitude" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1595 +msgid "For example, here is the mapping created between the metadata element mcp:revisionDate and the lucene index field changeDate:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1606 +msgid "Notice that we are creating a new XML document. The Field elements in this document are read by GeoNetwork to create a Lucene document object for indexing (see the SearchManager class in the GeoNetwork source)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1610 +msgid "Once again, because the MCP is a profile of ISO19115/19139, it is probably best to modify ``index-fields.xsl`` from the schema iso19139 to handle the namespaces and additional elements of the MCP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1624 +msgid "Creating the sample-data directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1626 +msgid "This is a simple directory. Put MEF files with sample metadata in this directory. Make sure they have a ``.mef`` suffix." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1629 +msgid "A MEF file is a zip archive with the metadata, thumbnails, file based online resources and an info file describing the contents. The contents of a MEF file are discussed in more detail in the next section of this manual." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1633 +msgid "Sample data in this directory can be added to the catalog using the Administration menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1646 +msgid "Creating schematrons to describe MCP conditions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1648 +msgid "Schematrons are rules that are used to check conditions and content in the metadata record as part of the two stage validation process used by GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1651 +msgid "Schematron rules are created in the schematrons directory that you checked out earlier - see :ref:`preparation` above." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1654 +msgid "An example rule is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1675 +msgid "As for most of GeoNetwork, the output of this rule can be localized to different languages. The corresponding localized strings are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1700 +msgid "Procedure for adding schematron rules, working within the schematrons directory:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1702 +msgid "Place your schematron rules in 'rules'. Naming convetion is 'schematron-rules-.sch' eg. ``schematron-rules-iso-mcp.sch``. Place localized strings for the rule assertions into 'rules/loc/'." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1707 +msgid "Schematron rules are compiled when the schema is loaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1719 +msgid "Adding the components necessary to create and edit MCP metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1721 +msgid "So far we have added all the components necessary for GeoNetwork to identify, view and validate MCP metadata records. Now we will add the remaining components necessary to create and edit MCP metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1725 +msgid "We'll start with the XSLTs that set the content of various elements in the MCP metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1729 +msgid "Creating set-uuid.xsl" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1731 +msgid "**set-uuid.xsl** - this XSLT takes as a parameter the UUID of the metadata record and writes it into the appropriate element of the metadata record. For the MCP this element is the same as the base ISO schema (called iso19139 in GeoNetwork), namely gmd:fileIdentifier. However, because the MCP uses a different namespace on the root element, this XSLT needs to be modified." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1739 +msgid "Creating the extract, set and unset thumbnail XSLTs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1741 +msgid "If your metadata record can have a thumbnail or browse graphic link, then you will want to add XSLTs that extract, set and unset this information so that you can use the GeoNetwork thumbnail editing interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1745 +msgid "The three XSLTs that support this interface are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1747 +msgid "**extract-thumbnails.xsl** - this XSLT extracts the thumbnails/browse graphics from the metadata record, turning it into generic XML that is the same for all metadata schemas. The elements need to have content that GeoNetwork understands. The following is an example of what the thumbnail interface for iso19139 expects (we'll duplicate this requirement for MCP):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1783 +msgid "When ``extract-thumbnails.xsl`` is run, it creates a small XML hierarchy from this information which looks something like the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1797 +msgid "**set-thumbnail.xsl** - this XSLT does the opposite of extract-thumbnails.xsl. It takes the simplified, common XML structure used by GeoNetwork to describe the large and small thumbnails and creates the elements of the metadata record that are needed to represent them. This is a slightly more complex XSLT than extract-thumbnails.xsl because the existing elements in the metadata record need to be retained and the new elements need to be created in their correct places." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1804 +msgid "**unset-thumbnail.xsl** - this XSLT targets and removes elements of the metadata record that describe a particular thumbnail. The remaining elements of the metadata record are retained." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1808 +msgid "Because the MCP is a profile of ISO19115/19139, the easiest path to creating these XSLTs is to copy them from the iso19139 schema and modify them for the changes in namespace required by the MCP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1813 +msgid "Creating the update-... XSLTs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1815 +msgid "**update-child-from-parent-info.xsl** - this XSLT is run when a child record needs to have content copied into it from a parent record. It is an XSLT that changes the content of a few elements and leaves the remaining elements untouched. The behaviour of this XSLT would depend on which elements of the parent record will be used to update elements of the child record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1821 +msgid "**update-fixed-info.xsl** - this XSLT is run after editing to fix certain elements and content in the metadata record. For the MCP there are a number of actions we would like to take to 'hard-wire' certain elements and content. To do this the XSLT the following processing logic:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1832 +msgid "Because the MCP is a profile of ISO19115/19139, the easiest path to creating this XSLT is to copy update-fixed-info.xsl from the iso19139 schema and modify it for the changes in namespace required by the MCP and then to include the processing we want." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1837 +msgid "A simple example of MCP processing is to make sure that the gmd:metadataStandardName and gmd:metadataStandardVersion elements have the content needed to ensure that the record is recognized as MCP. To do this we can add two templates as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1856 +msgid "Processing by ``update-fixed-info.xsl`` can be enabled/disabled using the *Automatic Fixes* check box in the System Configuration menu. By default, it is enabled." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1860 +msgid "Some important tasks handled in ``upgrade-fixed-info.xsl``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1862 +msgid "creating URLs for metadata with attached files (eg. onlineResources with 'File for download' in iso19139)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1864 +msgid "setting date stamp/revision date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1865 +msgid "setting codelist URLs to point to online ISO codelist catalogs" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1866 +msgid "adding default spatial reference system attributes to spatial extents" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1868 +msgid "A specific task required for the MCP ``update-fixed-info.xsl`` was to automatically create an online resource with a URL pointing to the metadata.show service with parameter set to the metadata uuid. This required some changes to the update-fixed-info.xsl supplied with iso19139. In particular:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1874 +msgid "the parent elements may not be present in the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1875 +msgid "processing of the online resource elements for the metadata point of truth URL should not interfere with other processing of online resource elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1878 +msgid "Rather than describe the individual steps required to implement this and the decisions required in the XSLT language, take a look at the ``update-fixed-info.xsl`` already present for the MCP schema in the iso19139.mcp directory and refer to the dot points above." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1885 +msgid "Creating the templates directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1887 +msgid "This is a simple directory. Put XML metadata files to be used as templates in this directory. Make sure they have a ``.xml`` suffix. Templates in this directory can be added to the catalog using the Administration menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1892 +msgid "Editor behaviour: Adding schema-suggestions.xml and schema-substitutes.xml" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1894 +msgid "**schema-suggestions.xml** - The default behaviour of the GeoNetwork advanced editor when building the editor forms is to show elements that are not in the metadata record as unexpanded elements. To add these elements to the record, the user will have to click on the '+' icon next to the element name. This can be tedious especially as some metadata standards have elements nested in others (ie. complex elements). The schema-suggestions.xml file allows you to specify elements that should be automatically expanded by the editor. An example of this is the online resource information in the ISO19115/19139 standard. If the following XML was added to the ``schema-suggestions.xml`` file:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1913 +msgid "The effect of this would be that when an online resource element was expanded, then input fields for the protocol (a drop down/select list), name and description would automatically appear in the editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1917 +msgid "Once again, a good place to start when building a ``schema-suggestions.xml`` file for the MCP is the ``schema-suggestions.xml`` file for the iso19139 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1920 +msgid "**schema-substitutes.xml** - Recall from the earlier :ref:`schema_and_schema_xsd` section, that the method we used to extend the base ISO19115/19139 schemas is to extend the base type, define a new element with the extended base type and allow the new element to substitute for the base element. So for example, in the MCP, we want to add a new resource constraint element that holds Creative Commons and other commons type licensing information. This requires that the MD_Constraints type be extended and a new mcp:MD_Commons element be defined which can substitute for gmd:MD_Constraints. This is shown in the following snippet of XSD:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1959 +msgid "For MCP records, the GeoNetwork editor will show a choice of elements from the substitution group for gmd:MD_Constraints when adding 'Resource Constraints' to the metadata document. This will now include mcp:MD_Commons." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1965 +msgid "Note that by similar process, two other elements, now deprecated in favour of MD_Commons, were also added as substitutes for MD_Constraints. If it was necessary to constrain the choices shown in this menu, say to remove the deprecated elements and limit the choices to just legal, security and commons, then this can be done by the following piece of XML in the schema-substitutes.xml file:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1980 +msgid "The result of this change is shown below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1984 +msgid "Once again, a good place to start when building a schema-substitutes.xml file for the MCP is the schema-substitutes.xml file for the iso19139 schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1989 +msgid "Adding components to support conversion of metadata records to other schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1992 +msgid "Creating the convert directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1994 +msgid "If the new GeoNetwork plugin schema is to support on the fly translation of metadata records to other schemas, then the convert directory should be created and populated with appropriate XSLTs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:1999 +msgid "Supporting OAIPMH conversions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:2001 +msgid "The OAIPMH server in GeoNetwork can deliver metadata records from any of the schemas known to GeoNetwork. It can also be configured to deliver schemas not known to GeoNetwork if an XSLT exists to convert a metadata record to that schema. The file ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/config-oai-prefixes.xml`` describes the schemas (known as prefixes in OAI speak) that can be produced by an XSLT. A simple example of the content of this file is shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:2016 +msgid "In the case of the prefix oai_dc shown above, if a schema converter with prefix *oai_dc* exists in the ``schema-conversions.xml`` file of a GeoNetwork schema, then records that belong to this schema will be transformed and included in OAIPMH requests for the *oai_dc* prefix. See :ref:`schema_conversions` for more info." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/implementing-a-schema-plugin.rst:2022 +msgid "To add oai_dc support for the MCP, the easiest method is to copy oai_dc.xsl from the convert directory of the iso19139 schema, modify it to cope with the different namespaces and additional elements of the MCP and add it to the ``schema-conversions.xml`` file for the MCP." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/index.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1727325 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/index.rst:4 +msgid "Customizing guide" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/misc.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/misc.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90374534 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/misc.pot @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:4 +msgid "Miscellaneous" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:7 +msgid "Invalid CSRF Token" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:9 +msgid "GeoNetwork has a security filter that prevents CSRF attacks. See more info about this type of attack on https://www.owasp.org/index.php/Cross-Site_Request_Forgery_(CSRF) . All calls to POST, DELETE and PUT endpoints without the proper token will return an error." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:13 +msgid "By default, all AngularJS requests will take care of this token, but all third party APIs and custom user interface calls will have to manually add this token to the request. The token is stored on a cookie called XSRF-TOKEN. This cookie constains a string that has to be added to all requests either by a parameter called \"_csrf\" or by a header called X-XSRF-TOKEN." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:18 +msgid "Example of CSRF call using curl" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:20 +msgid "First, fo a call to a POST endpoint to get the session and the csrf" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/misc.rst:44 +msgid "Then, using the cookie and the token, you can do whatever you want:" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28251574 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.pot @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:5 +msgid "Change default view configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:8 +msgid "The Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:10 +msgid "In order to make developers able to specify some configuration settings, we tried as much as possible to use settings instead of hardcoded value in core code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:12 +msgid "Those settings are mainly stored in 2 AngularJS ``value`` objects:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:14 +msgid "``gnViewerSettings``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:15 +msgid "``gnSearchSettings``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:17 +msgid "Those objects are injected via AngularJs ``$inject`` concept into all core services and directives." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:20 +msgid "Viewer settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:22 +msgid "The ``gnViewSettings`` object contains all settings regarding to the map viewer page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:24 +msgid "``defaultContext`` : path to the default OWS Context. If not set, the ``ol.View`` object needs to be defined for your map." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:25 +msgid "``bgLayers`` : Array of layers that will be managed by the background layer selector. This value is used only if ``defaultContext`` is not defined." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:26 +msgid "``servicesUrl`` : Config object for predefined WMS and WMTS servers entries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:30 +msgid "Search settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:32 +msgid "The ``gnSearchSettings`` object contains all settings regarding to the main search page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:34 +msgid "``olStyles`` : ``ol.style.Style`` definition for some features in the map (drawn object, measure, metadata extent bounding box etc...)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:35 +msgid "``viewerMap`` : The ``ol.Map`` object used for the viewer. This map object may be extended if you have set the ``defaultContext`` setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:36 +msgid "``searchMap`` : The ``ol.Map`` object used for the search page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:37 +msgid "``hitsperpageValues`` : An array to specify the possible values for the number of metadata by result page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:38 +msgid "``sortbyValues`` : An array to specify the possible values for the sort by option in the result list page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:39 +msgid "``resultViewTpls`` : The template used to render search result. By default it is a grid." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:40 +msgid "``formatter`` : Set options to the metadata view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:41 +msgid "``linkTypes`` : Binding between resources protocol and action in metadata result list (for example open WMS in mapviewer)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:44 +msgid "Update this settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:46 +msgid "Note that some settings are set in the database (for example the ``viewerSettings.mapConfig`` object comes from database settings) so you can edit them in :ref:`settings admin page `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:49 +msgid "For others, you can just edit the config file (See :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/config.js`) and change some setting values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/configdefault.rst:51 +msgid "If you change existing files, you expose yourself to having merge issues on new version upgrades. The best way keeps to create your own view." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a12b451b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:5 +msgid "Create your own view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:7 +msgid "If you prefer not to edit shared default files, or if you want a really different UI, the best way is to create your own custom view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:10 +msgid "Add a new view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:12 +msgid "As presented in previous section, you will need to set up several files to load a new UI view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:14 +msgid "create a new folder in ``web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:15 +msgid "add a ``templates/index.html`` in this folder." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:16 +msgid "add a javascript file loading your main AngularJS module" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:17 +msgid "add less files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:20 +msgid "Customize your view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:22 +msgid "Let's say we want to create a custom view name `geoportal`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:24 +msgid "You will need to create a new folder ``web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/geoportal``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:26 +msgid "Add a new file ``web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/geoportal/templates/index.html`` containing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:33 +msgid "Add a new file ``web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/geoportal/search.js`` containing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:47 +msgid "You must include ``gn_search`` module." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:49 +msgid "Add a new file ``web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/geoportal/views/geoportal/less/gn_search_geoportal.less`` containing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:59 +msgid "Launch your view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:61 +msgid "To see your new view, you can launch the `catalog.search` service with a new parameter view: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/catalog.search?view=geoportal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/customview.rst:64 +msgid "Or, go into admin settings page and set the ``system/ui/defaultView`` to ``geoportal``." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28eed576 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.pot @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:5 +msgid "Enrich your custom view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:8 +msgid "Now we created our structure with basic content, we want to create a real catalog page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:10 +msgid "For that, you can include default view content, or build your own application on top of core GeoNetwork components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:13 +msgid "GeoNetwork components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:15 +msgid "UI design is based on shared widgets, logic and components. In AngularJS terms, we talk about `services` and `directives`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:18 +msgid "All components are stored in the folder `components `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:20 +msgid "Main page usefull components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:22 +msgid "Main search input" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:39 +msgid "Facets panel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:50 +msgid "Alert info manager" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:56 +msgid "Result list" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:66 +msgid "Geographic search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:75 +msgid "Main map components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:77 +msgid "wmsimport" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:78 +msgid "map search input" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:79 +msgid "draw panel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:80 +msgid "measure panel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:81 +msgid "print panel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:82 +msgid "layer manager" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:83 +msgid "background layer selector" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:84 +msgid "etc..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:86 +msgid "So you can reuse all these components in your templates to build the view you want." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:90 +msgid "Styles" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:92 +msgid "You should import default style and add custom CSS rules instead of creating your own from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:94 +msgid "In ``gn_search_geoportal.less``, import default less files." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:96 +msgid "Import common search styles (if you start a new view from scratch)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:103 +msgid "Import default view search styles (if you base your view on top of default one)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/enrichview.rst:109 +msgid "Then, in your less file, you can start adding new rules" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/index.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4011810e --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/index.rst:4 +msgid "Search application" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..222b660c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:5 +msgid "Create your own view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:8 +msgid "The search page is served by `catalog.search` service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:10 +msgid "This service ends up into ``base-layout-cssjs-loader.xsl`` (See :code:`web/src/main/webapp/xslt/base-layout-cssjs-loader.xsl`) which contains the logic to load the right html page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:14 +msgid "The view parameter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:16 +msgid "You can pass a parameter ``view`` to the `catalog.search` url to point on a custom view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:18 +msgid "If no parameter is specified, the view value will be taken from the ``system/ui/defaultView`` settings, and if no setting is set, is value will be ``default``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:21 +msgid "It will be stored in ``$searchView`` XSLT variable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:24 +msgid "Loading the view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:26 +msgid "The view is loaded from (See :code:`web/src/main/webapp/xslt/ui-search/search.xsl`):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:33 +msgid "The view main template is loaded through the AngularJS directive ``ng-include`` and will point on the path ``/web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/${view}/templates/index.html``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:36 +msgid "For the default view, you can find this template in :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/templates/index.html`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:40 +msgid "Loading the javascript" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:42 +msgid "To init AngularJS main module you have to use the directive `ng-app` and point on your main AngularJS module." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:48 +msgid "In the case of the search page (`catalog.search`), the ``$angularApp`` variable equals ``gn_search``. And for the `default` view the ``$angularModule`` equals ``gn_search_default``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:51 +msgid "So, by default, the main AngularJS module is loaded here from ``gn_search_default`` module declared here (See :code:`web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/module.js`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:54 +msgid "From here, you can build your AngularJS module dependency tree and load your application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:57 +msgid "CSS files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/loadview.rst:59 +msgid "In the same logic, the CSS that is loaded into the page is ``gn_search_default.less``." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.pot b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7e2b155 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:5 +msgid "Wro4j resource management" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:7 +msgid "Wro4j lib is used to manage resources of the web applications. Mostly, it" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:10 +msgid "builds dependency tree between js source files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:11 +msgid "minifies javascript" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:12 +msgid "compiles lesse file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:13 +msgid "manages live update in development mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:14 +msgid "manages caching in production mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:17 +msgid "Dependency Tree" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:19 +msgid "When the AngularJs entry module is ``gn_search_geoportal``, the wro4j entry point is the key ``gn_search_geoportal`` as well, that means that it is the file that declares ``goog.provide('gn_search_geoportal')``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:23 +msgid "That is why you need to be sure there is a good mapping between AngularJs module dependencies and wro4j dependency tree." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:25 +msgid "For example, when you have this for wro4j:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:35 +msgid "You need to be sure you create your AngularJs module with same dependency injection:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:47 +msgid "Whenever you change a ``goog.require`` or ``goog.provide`` statements, you need to relaunch wro4j dependency tree creation. This can be done with jetty or tomcat restart." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/customizing-application/search-ui/wro4jdependencies.rst:51 +msgid "Following this principles, you are now free to add new modules, components, directives or services to your application." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/index.pot b/_build/locale/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8d640b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/index.rst:4 +msgid "Full table of contents" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/backup/index.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/backup/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09ebc498 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/backup/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/backup/index.rst:4 +msgid "Backup the application" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/index.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2078a141 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/index.rst:4 +msgid "Maintainer guide" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63c8a5e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.pot @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:5 +msgid "Configuring the database" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:7 +msgid "This section describe how to configure the database connection." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:9 +msgid "By default, an `H2 `_ database is configured and created when the application first start. The H2 database named ``geonetwork.h2.db`` is created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:13 +msgid "when using the installer, in the ``jetty`` folder" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:15 +msgid "when deploying the WAR on Tomcat and using ``startup.sh``, in the ``bin`` folder of Tomcat" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:18 +msgid "To modify the database configuration, first check which type of database is used. Depending on the node (default node name is |default.node|) check the node configuration file |default.node.config.file|. Choose the database type to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:22 +msgid "Then update the |jdbc.properties| file with connection information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:24 +msgid "The database default structure will be created by the application on startup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/configuring-database.rst:27 +msgid "To have more details about database connection and queries, log can be switched to DEBUG level in :code:`web/src/main/webapp/WEB-INF/classes/log4j.xml` (or see :ref:`system-config-server` > Log level)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4084390c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.pot @@ -0,0 +1,278 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:4 +msgid "Customizing the data directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:6 +msgid "The data directory is the location on the file system where the catalog stores much of its custom configuration and uploaded files. This configuration defines such things as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:10 +msgid "What thesaurus is used by GeoNetwork?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:11 +msgid "What schema is plugged in GeoNetwork?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:13 +msgid "The data directory also contains a number of support files used by the catalog for various purposes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:16 +msgid "Lucene index" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:17 +msgid "spatial index" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:18 +msgid "logos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:19 +msgid "uploaded document attached to metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:20 +msgid "thumbnails" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:23 +msgid "It is a good idea to define an external data directory when going to production in order to make future updates easier. The data directory allows to run the WAR in readonly mode if needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:29 +msgid "Creating a new data directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:31 +msgid "The data directory needs to be created before starting the catalogue. It must be readable and writable by the user starting the catalogue." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:35 +msgid "If the data directory is an empty folder, the catalogue will initialize the directory default structure using ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/data``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:39 +msgid "If the data directory is not set, the following message is displayed in the log when the application starts:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:48 +msgid "If the data directory is not accessible for the user, the log displays:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:58 +msgid "Setting the data directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:60 +msgid "The data directory variable can be set using:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:62 +msgid "Java environment variable" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:63 +msgid "Servlet context parameter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:64 +msgid "System environment variable" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:65 +msgid "Bean configuration (added in version 3.0.4)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:68 +msgid "For java environment variable and servlet context parameter use:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:70 +msgid ".dir and if not set using geonetwork.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:73 +msgid "For system environment variable use:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:75 +msgid "_dir and if not set using geonetwork_dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:77 +msgid "Resolution order is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:79 +msgid ".dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:81 +msgid "Java environment variable (ie. -D.dir=/a/data/dir)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:83 +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:93 +msgid "Servlet context parameter (ie. web.xml)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:85 +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:95 +msgid "Config.xml appHandler parameter (ie. config.xml)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:87 +msgid "System environment variable (ie. _dir=/a/data/dir). \".\" is not supported in env variables" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:89 +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:216 +msgid "geonetwork.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:91 +msgid "Java environment variable (ie. -Dgeonetwork.dir=/a/data/dir)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:97 +msgid "System environment variable (ie. geonetwork_dir=/a/data/dir). \".\" is not supported in env variables" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:103 +msgid "Java System Property" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:105 +msgid "Depending on the servlet container used it is also possible to specify the data directory location with a Java System Property." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:108 +msgid "For Tomcat, configuration is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:116 +msgid "Bean configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:120 +msgid "To configure the data directory using a custom bean configuration, update the GeonetworkDataDirectory bean in :code:`core/src/main/resources/config-spring-geonetwork.xml`:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:142 +msgid "Structure of the data directory" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:144 +msgid "The data directory contains:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:174 +msgid "Advanced data directory configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:176 +msgid "All sub-directories could be configured separately using java system property. For example, to put index directory in a custom location use:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:179 +msgid ".lucene.dir and if not set using:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:180 +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:217 +msgid "geonetwork.lucene.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:183 +msgid "Examples:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:185 +msgid "Add the following java properties to start-geonetwork.sh script:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:194 +msgid "Add the following system properties to start-geonetwork.sh script:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:202 +msgid "If no changes are made to thesaurus or schema, it could be relevant to use the version from the webapp. In such case, set:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:214 +msgid "The list of properties that can be set are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:218 +msgid "geonetwork.spatial.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:219 +msgid "geonetwork.config.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:220 +msgid "geonetwork.codeList.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:221 +msgid "geonetwork.schema.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:222 +msgid "geonetwork.data.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:223 +msgid "geonetwork.resources.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:224 +msgid "geonetwork.svn.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:225 +msgid "geonetwork.upload.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:226 +msgid "geonetwork.backup.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:227 +msgid "geonetwork.formatter.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:228 +msgid "geonetwork.htmlcache.dir" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:232 +msgid "Check the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/customizing-data-directory.rst:234 +msgid "After startup, check the configuration in ``Administration`` > ``System Information`` page." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/index.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af9a9952 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/index.rst:4 +msgid "Installing the application" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/index.rst:8 +msgid "GeoNetwork requires a Java 8 environment (JRE) to be installed on your system. This must be done prior to installation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/index.rst:11 +msgid "Before using |project_name| on your own computer, you need to install it. There is different ways to install |project_name|:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/index.rst:24 +msgid "After installing the application, you can can configure the following:" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-source-code.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-source-code.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14ce9ef8 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-source-code.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-source-code.rst:4 +msgid "Installing from source code" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-the-installer.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-the-installer.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9be20ff --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-the-installer.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-the-installer.rst:4 +msgid "Installing from the installer" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..215eb9a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.pot @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.rst:4 +msgid "Installing from WAR file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.rst:6 +msgid "Download ``geonetwork.war``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.rst:7 +msgid "Copy the WAR file in the webapp folder of Tomcat." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.rst:8 +msgid "If started, Tomcat will automatically deploy the application. If not, start Tomcat to deploy." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-from-war-file.rst:10 +msgid "You need to ensure Tomcat is configured with enough memory for GeoNetwork to launch. This can be be configured via the ``setenv`` script in tomcat with the appropriate memory for the JAVA_OPTS property)" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c139e67b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:4 +msgid "Installing remote index" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:6 +msgid "If users want to analyze WFS data (See :ref:`analyzing_data`), an `Elasticsearch ` instance can be installed next to the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:11 +msgid "Manual installation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:13 +msgid "Download Elasticsearch from https://www.elastic.co/downloads/elasticsearch and unzip the file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:24 +msgid "Manually start and stop Elasticsearch using:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:31 +msgid "Then create the default index:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:42 +msgid "Stop Elasticsearch using" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:51 +msgid "Install using maven" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:53 +msgid "Running from the source code, use maven to download." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:65 +msgid "To stop Elasticsearch when using maven, simply stop the process as Elasticsearch is started in foreground mode." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:70 +msgid "Check installation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:72 +msgid "Access Elasticsearch admin page from http://localhost:9200/." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:76 +msgid "Configure connection" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/installing-index.rst:78 +msgid "Update Elasticsearch URL in ```WEB-INF/config.properties``` and restart the application (see :code:`web/src/main/webResources/WEB-INF/config.properties`)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5372c6ce --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.pot @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:4 +msgid "Loading templates and sample data" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:6 +msgid "Open a web browser and go to the GeoNetwork homepage. If you installed it on your computer, this is probably at ``http://localhost:8080/geonetwork``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:8 +msgid "When you use Docker, you can find our what IP and Port to connect to from the Kitematic application. Or run ``docker ps`` in a terminal (on Linux or OSX). This should give you the port the Docker is running on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:12 +msgid "Your opening screen should look like this:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:17 +msgid "Signing in and loading templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:20 +msgid "Click the ``sign in`` to connect as administrator. The default account is username ``admin`` with password ``admin``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:26 +msgid "Once connected, the top toolbar should provide a link to the ``Admin console`` and your login details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:32 +msgid "Go to the ``Admin console`` and click on ``Metadata and templates``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:37 +msgid "Choose the metadata standards you wish to use and click ``Load templates for selected standards`` and then ``Load samples for selected standards`` in order to load the example data:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:41 +msgid "Once loaded, you will see an Import report on the right side of your screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/loading-samples.rst:43 +msgid "You can now go back to the Search page to see the loaded examples:" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c83a3cb --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.pot @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:4 +msgid "Using multinode mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:7 +msgid "Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:9 +msgid "The multinodes mode add the capability to setup more than one catalog using the same web application. By default, only one node is available. The node named is \"srv\". Each nodes have their own:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:13 +msgid "data directory (index, files)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:14 +msgid "database" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:17 +msgid "The main data directory contains one data folder per node." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:20 +msgid "This simplify catalog updates for users maintaining a set of catalogs. It also save resources by sharing some part of the application eg. all catalogs share the same schemas and thesaurus (to save memory)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:26 +msgid "User can only login in one node at a time in the same browser (only one session allowed). When identified, if user tries to switch to another node, the catalog propose:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:30 +msgid "to log out and continue to the requested node" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:31 +msgid "to return to previous node" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:37 +msgid "Installations running 200 nodes / servers have been setup. Such configuration require to increase JVM memory configuration (~4Go for Xmx parameter)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:42 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:47 +msgid "Trusted hosts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:49 +msgid "In |web.xml|, add the list of hosts name or IP used to access the catalog in the ``trustedHost`` parameter for the following filter:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:68 +msgid "If you change the hosts name or IP used to access a catalog node in the Web Server or the Java Container, you must update the value in the ``trustedHost`` parameter also." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:72 +msgid "Registering new node manually" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:74 +msgid "Registering a new node is a 2 steps process. First declare the new node in |web.xml| in order to declare the URL mapping:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:86 +msgid "Then define the node configuration in ``WEB-INF/config-node/{{node_id}}.xml``. The configuration defines:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:89 +msgid "the node identifier (and if the node is the default one)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:90 +msgid "the db connection to use" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:92 +msgid "Only one default node is allowed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:94 +msgid "For example, to configure a node named ``geosource-8`` using a ``postgres`` database use the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:134 +msgid "Styling the node" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:136 +msgid "A custom styling could be defined for each node. Add a new css file in ``catalog/style`` folder. The file name should be like this (replace NODENAME with the proper value): ``NODENAME_custom_style.css``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:141 +msgid "Creating a node using utility script" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:144 +msgid "In ``WEB-INF/node-utils``, the ``node-mgr.sh`` script helps adding new node eg. to add a node with id ``geosource-1044``, in the host ``www.geosource.com`` connecting to ``postgres`` database ``db_1044`` with a pool size of ``2`` connections, use:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:156 +msgid "The script does the following tasks:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:158 +msgid "Adds to |web.xml| the ``servlet-mapping`` and updates the ``trustedHost`` element for the new node." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:160 +msgid "Creates the node configuration in ``WEB-INF/config-node/{{node_id}}.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/installing/using-multinode-mode.rst:162 +msgid "Creates CSS style file for the node in the ``catalog/style`` folder." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/automatic-update.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/automatic-update.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89d6a081 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/automatic-update.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/updating/automatic-update.rst:4 +msgid "Automatic update" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/index.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c13b2611 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/updating/index.rst:4 +msgid "Updating the application" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/manual-update.pot b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/manual-update.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f22105bc --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/maintainer-guide/updating/manual-update.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/maintainer-guide/updating/manual-update.rst:4 +msgid "Manual update" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/about.pot b/_build/locale/overview/about.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8afeeb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/about.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/about.rst:4 +msgid "About" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/authors.pot b/_build/locale/overview/authors.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ebb1756 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/authors.pot @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:4 +msgid "Author" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:7 +msgid "Project Steering Committee (PSC)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:9 +msgid "The GeoNetwork Project Steering Committee (PSC) makes decisions on GeoNetwork opensource project issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:12 +msgid "In brief the committee votes on proposals on the geonetwork-dev mailinglist. Proposals are available for review for at least two days, and a single veto is sufficient to delay progress though ultimately a majority of members can pass a proposal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:18 +msgid "Members of the Project Steering Committee" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:20 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:43 +msgid "Emanuele Tajariol" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:21 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:45 +msgid "Florent Gravin" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:22 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:46 +msgid "Francois Prunayre" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:23 +msgid "Jeroen Ticheler - Chair" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:24 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:48 +msgid "Jesse Eichar" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:25 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:49 +msgid "Jose Garcia" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:26 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:52 +msgid "Patrizia Monteduro" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:27 +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:54 +msgid "Simon Pigot" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:30 +msgid "Former members of the PSC" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:32 +msgid "Andrea Carboni" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:33 +msgid "Archie Warnock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:37 +msgid "Committers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:39 +msgid "Committers list is available `here for the core team `_ and `here for the documenter team `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:44 +msgid "Craig Jones" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:47 +msgid "Jeroen Ticheler" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:50 +msgid "Maria Arias de Reyna" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:51 +msgid "Mathieu Coudert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:53 +msgid "Pierre Mauduit" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:58 +msgid "Contributors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:61 +msgid "Contributors list is available `here `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:64 +msgid "The documentation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/authors.rst:66 +msgid "The documentation was written by the GeoNetwork opensource developers and other community members." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/index.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a173caf --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/index.rst:4 +msgid "Change log" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.0.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.0.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..333e7899 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.0.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.0.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.0.0" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e9812f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.pot @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.0.1" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:8 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:10 +msgid "`Map viewer provides now 3D mode `_ using `Cesiumjs `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:11 +msgid "Make your map in the visualization tools and `save your maps in the catalog `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:12 +msgid "`Spatial filter is now available on the minimap `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:13 +msgid "`Browse catalog by INSPIRE themes `_ and use the new `INSPIRE icon set `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:14 +msgid "`Resource status is clearly displayed in search results `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:15 +msgid "Record view better displays links to local file on the network and database tables" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:16 +msgid "Multiple bounding boxes are supported on bounding box map highlighter and record view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:17 +msgid "Sitemap is paginated" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:21 +msgid "Bug Fixes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:23 +msgid "Fix map printing on Tomcat 8" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:24 +msgid "Metadata editor now properly compute extent from geographic keyword" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:25 +msgid "Properly upload thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.1.rst:27 +msgid "and more ... see `3.0.1 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..386e7650 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.pot @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.0.2" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:8 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:10 +msgid "Search / Add hierarchical facet support" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:11 +msgid "Search / Add facet on source catalog and resolution" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:12 +msgid "Metadata view / Better navigation between datasets and maps" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:13 +msgid "Editor / Automatically enable workflow for records in a group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:14 +msgid "Thesaurus / Update region thesaurus based on Natural Earth and Sea Vox" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:15 +msgid "Processing / Vacuum batch process help cleaning ISO19139 and Dublin Core records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:16 +msgid "Harvester / Filesystem harvester can harvest subtemplates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:17 +msgid "Administration / End of session notification (See :ref:`user-session`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:20 +msgid "Bug Fixes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.2.rst:23 +msgid "and more ... see `3.0.2 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39e93693 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.pot @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.0.3" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:8 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:10 +msgid "Search / Better support of INSPIRE themes in multilingual metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:11 +msgid "Editor / Thesaurus broader/narrower/related concepts navigation (eg. GEMET)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:12 +msgid "Editor / Metadata identifier templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:13 +msgid "CSW / Improved interoperability with other implementations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:14 +msgid "CSW / Pluggable output schema (required for ISO19115-3 support)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:15 +msgid "Administration / Define default and a set of category per group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:16 +msgid "Administration / Lock user account" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:20 +msgid "Bug Fixes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.3.rst:22 +msgid "and more ... see `3.0.3 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb07fb0c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.pot @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.0.4" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:8 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:10 +msgid "DCAT enhancements: CSW/OAI-PMH dcat outputs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:11 +msgid "Allow user to change its user details and password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:12 +msgid "Allows to set all datadir paths (not only geonetwork.dir) via overrides and bean properties." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:16 +msgid "Bug Fixes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:18 +msgid "Geopublisher fixes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:19 +msgid "Privileges / RegisteredUser in group A MUST not be able to edit records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:20 +msgid "Saving a metadata with an empty keyword value creates invalid metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.0.4.rst:22 +msgid "and more ... see `3.0.4 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d82b1892 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.2.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:7 +msgid "New requirements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:9 +msgid "This release requires the use of Java 8, and is compatible with both Oracle JDK and Open JDK." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:12 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:14 +msgid "WFS feature indexing (see :ref:`getfeature_harvester`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:15 +msgid "A new REST API (beta) is available. The documentation is available http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/doc/api" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:16 +msgid "User feedback form" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:17 +msgid "Editor / Associated resources can be updated without the advanced view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:18 +msgid "Editor / Filter contact directory with facets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:19 +msgid "Editor / XML view provides code editing with syntax highlighting and more, ..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:20 +msgid "Directories can be populated from catalog content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:21 +msgid "Metadata import improved (import by URL, import multiple files at once, better error reports)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:22 +msgid "GeoServer updated to `version 2.9.0 `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:23 +msgid "Added schema.org tags for better indexing by search engine" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:26 +msgid "Removed features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:28 +msgid "ExtJS user interface removed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:29 +msgid "Z39.50 server removed (SRU support still available)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.0.rst:32 +msgid "and more ... see `3.2.0 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02a7a887 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.2.1" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:6 +msgid "This is a maintenance release with `lots of bug fixed `_ and some new features:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:9 +msgid "Add multiple parallel selection support" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:10 +msgid "`Add CORS header configuration `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:11 +msgid "Editor / `User can configure table layout `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:12 +msgid "RDF / `URI prefix can be customized and records URI resolves `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:13 +msgid "Processing / Add capability to preview process results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.1.rst:16 +msgid "and more ... see `3.2.1 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fe4e009 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.2.2" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:6 +msgid "This is a maintenance release with `lots of bug fixed `_ and some new features:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:9 +msgid "`CSRF token support `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:10 +msgid "`Fixes for Oracle DB `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:11 +msgid "Harvester / `Support for ArcSDE direct connection `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:12 +msgid "Remove duplicated postgres driver" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:13 +msgid "HTTP requests / connection not released" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.2.2.rst:16 +msgid "and more ... see `3.2.2 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.pot b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b9d4efd --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.pot @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.rst:4 +msgid "Version 3.4.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.rst:7 +msgid "New features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.rst:11 +msgid "Removed features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/change-log/version-3.4.0.rst:14 +msgid "and more ... see `3.4.0 issues `_ and `pull requests `_ for full details." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/index.pot b/_build/locale/overview/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5497f0c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:4 +msgid "Overview" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:6 +msgid "The GeoNetwork project started out in year 2001 as a Spatial Data Catalogue System for the Food and Agriculture organisation of the United Nations (`FAO `_), the United Nations World Food Programme (`WFP `_) and the United Nations Environmental Programme (`UNEP `_)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:11 +msgid "At present the project is widely used as the basis of Spatial Data Infrastructures all around the world." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:14 +msgid "The project is part of the Open Source Geospatial Foundation (`OSGeo `_) and can be found at `GeoNetwork opensource `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:17 +msgid "These docs are organized into specific guides targeting different audience:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:22 +msgid ":ref:`user-guide`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/index.rst:20 +msgid "The guide for people who will be using the catalog web interface." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/overview/license.pot b/_build/locale/overview/license.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7471c80b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/overview/license.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/overview/license.rst:4 +msgid "License" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/overview/license.rst:6 +msgid "The GeoNetwork opensource software is released under the `GPL v2 license `_ and can be used and modified free of charge." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fed55b41 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/index.rst:4 +msgid "Customize your GeoNetwork UI" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/index.rst:15 +msgid "For editor customization see :ref:`creating-custom-editor`:." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/customview.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/customview.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8dc29517 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/customview.pot @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:5 +msgid "Customizing default view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:7 +msgid "Follow :ref:`instructions ` and create your first custom view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:11 +msgid "Exercices" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:13 +msgid "Create a new view with almost no content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:14 +msgid "Make your new view looks like the default one" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:15 +msgid "Create your own result list template" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:16 +msgid "Make main templates url customizable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:17 +msgid "Put the search map uppon facets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:18 +msgid "Let's build a new search page quickly" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:21 +msgid "Corrections" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:23 +msgid "Go to https://github.com/fgravin/core-geonetwork/commits/foss4g" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:25 +msgid "step-1" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:26 +msgid "step-2" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:27 +msgid "step-3" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:28 +msgid "step-4" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:29 +msgid "step-5" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/customview.rst:30 +msgid "step-6" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1613f26 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:5 +msgid "Customizing default view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:8 +msgid "Objectives" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:10 +msgid "Read instructions about :ref:`default view customization `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:12 +msgid "Understand view settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:13 +msgid "Be able to customize the default view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:16 +msgid "Exercices" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:18 +msgid "Propose 4 hits per page options for search result list : 2, 5, 10, 20." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:19 +msgid "Propose to sort only by change date and title." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:20 +msgid "Use Stamen layer source for search map background." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:21 +msgid "Recenter search map on Seoul" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:24 +msgid "Change full map configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:23 +msgid "play with initial extent" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:24 +msgid "change brackground layer list" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:25 +msgid "add WMS layers to the default map" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:26 +msgid "Change default location for map search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:27 +msgid "Change WMS/WMTS default services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:28 +msgid "Customize full map without OWS Context" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/defaultview.rst:29 +msgid "Disable map viewer" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f49a791 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/index.rst:4 +msgid "Search page" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55a563f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.pot @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:5 +msgid "Understand loading page mechanisms" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:8 +msgid "Objectives" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:10 +msgid "Read instructions in :ref:`customization section `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:12 +msgid "understand the XSL service output" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:13 +msgid "look at the ``view`` parameter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:14 +msgid "understand main template loading" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:15 +msgid "understand javascript modules bootstrap" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:18 +msgid "Resources" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:20 +msgid "XSLT files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:22 +msgid "`base layout `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:23 +msgid "`js and css loader `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:24 +msgid "`variables `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:25 +msgid "`search page `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:27 +msgid "Template files" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:29 +msgid "https://github.com/geonetwork/core-geonetwork/blob/develop/web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/templates/index.html" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:31 +msgid "AngularJS module" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:33 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:37 +msgid "https://github.com/geonetwork/core-geonetwork/blob/develop/web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/module.js" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/search/loadpage.rst:35 +msgid "Less file" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffffb504 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.pot @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:5 +msgid "Create a new formatter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:8 +msgid "Objectives" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:9 +msgid "oversee groovy formatter mechnism" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:10 +msgid "understand handlers, matchers concepts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:11 +msgid "create a small formatter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:14 +msgid "Exercices" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:16 +msgid "Add a new formatter that display all text information of the metadata in basic layout." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:17 +msgid "Update previous formatter to display labels of the text fields." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:18 +msgid "Use formatter templating system to render the handler's view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:19 +msgid "Add styling to your formatter view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:20 +msgid "Create a tree for rendering elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:21 +msgid "Use translation of iso elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:22 +msgid "Use default tree styling" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:23 +msgid "Use all default view formatter elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:24 +msgid "Customise default formatter view" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:25 +msgid "Overload handlers methods" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:28 +msgid "Corrections" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:30 +msgid "Go to https://github.com/fgravin/core-geonetwork/commits/foss4g" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:32 +msgid "1. Create a new formatter - create a new folder named 'foss4g\" in /schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/formatter - create a new groovy file in this new folder - text information are stored in ``gco:CharacterString``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:41 +msgid "Add a matcher and play with ``name`` and ``text`` properties." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:49 +msgid "Use ``handlers.fileResult`` function" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:51 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:95 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:113 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:141 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:157 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:180 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:194 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:217 +msgid "view.groovy" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:59 +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:127 +msgid "elem.html" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:68 +msgid "Add a custom less file in wro4j inspected folders and link it to your formatter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:70 +msgid "formatter.less" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:111 +msgid "Use ``fmt-repeat-only-children`` in template and ``prent()`` function." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:139 +msgid "See ``nodeLabel`` function" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:155 +msgid "Add ``gn-metadata-view`` class to your container update your handler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:178 +msgid "See ``SummaryFactory`` class." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:192 +msgid "Add custom option to the ``SummaryFactory``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/formatter.rst:215 +msgid "Add custom behavior to ``iso19139.Handlers`` constructor" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..279886fa --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/customui/view/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/customui/view/index.rst:4 +msgid "Formatter" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08fbe190 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:4 +msgid "Using Events" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:6 +msgid "From GeoNetwork 3.0.x on, there are a number of events you can listen to on your Java code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:9 +msgid "Enabling Event Listeners" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:11 +msgid "To enable this on your Maven project, you have to add the event dependencies. Edit the file custom/pom.xml and add the dependencies tag:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:30 +msgid "Then create the file custom/src/main/resources/config-spring-geonetwork.xml to tell Spring to load your custom beans adding the following content:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:34 +msgid " " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:49 +msgid "This file should contain a list of all the classes that listen to events inside GeoNetwork scope." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:52 +msgid "Simple Example" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:54 +msgid "We can add a simple example listener like this one, which will print a string every time a metadata gets removed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:58 +msgid "package org.fao.geonet.events.listeners;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:60 +msgid "import org.fao.geonet.domain.*;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:62 +msgid "import org.fao.geonet.events.md.MetadataRemove;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:64 +msgid "import org.springframework.context.ApplicationListener;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:66 +msgid "import org.springframework.stereotype.Component;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:68 +msgid "@Component public class MyCustomListener implements ApplicationListener {" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:70 +msgid "@Override public void onApplicationEvent(MetadataRemove event) {" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:72 +msgid "System.out.println(\"REMOVED\");" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:73 +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:74 +msgid "}" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:77 +msgid "For example, we can call an external REST API that gets triggered every time a Metadata gets removed or updated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:81 +msgid "GeoNetwork API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/events/index.rst:83 +msgid "There is also a new API you can use to interact with GeoNetwork from an external script. See more on :ref:`api-guide`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b234c705 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.rst:4 +msgid "Hook your own code" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.rst:6 +msgid "At the end of this tutorial, you should be able to customize your own code into GeoNetwork on a clean and easy to upgrade way. You should start with the :ref:`tuto-introduction` tutorial first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/index.rst:17 +msgid "For ui customization see :ref:`tuto-customui`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b0bb99e --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:4 +msgid "Separate your code" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:6 +msgid "GeoNetwork is built using Maven. This means, there are several folders inside the source code and each of them is a different Maven project that can be built separatedly." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:12 +msgid "Create your own project" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:15 +msgid "The best way to work with GeoNetwork and easily upgrade later is add your own Maven project(s) to the Maven build stack, so GeoNetwork code remains unaltered and your changes are decoupled." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:17 +msgid "To do this, go to the root folder of the source code and create a new folder. This can be done on a GNU/Linux terminal using the following command:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:24 +msgid "Then we have to tell Maven this is a new project that can be built. So we add a new file called pom.xml on this \"custom\" folder and add the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:70 +msgid "Add your project" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:72 +msgid "Then you should add it to the list of projects maven will automatically build. On the root folder of the source code, edit the file pom.xml and add your own project:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:85 +msgid "The idea is that not only we build the project, but also add it to the war file that is being generated. To do this, we edit the file web/pom.xml and add our project as a new dependency inside the tag dependencies:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:95 +msgid "And on the same file, we should also add our resources folder to the build (if we are going to modify the UI, which we will on this tutorial):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:106 +msgid "${project.basedir}/src/main/webapp, ${rootProjectDir}/web-ui/src/main/resources/, ${rootProjectDir}/custom/src/main/resources/, ${build.webapp.resources} " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/newproject/index.rst:112 +msgid "Now, if we build GeoNetwork, it will also build and add our project." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/schemaplugins/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/schemaplugins/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebbae4e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/schemaplugins/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/schemaplugins/index.rst:4 +msgid "Schema Plugins" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/schemaplugins/index.rst:6 +msgid "See :ref:`implementing-a-schema-plugin`" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4cf34f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:4 +msgid "Search Fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:6 +msgid "Lucene is the search engine used by GeoNetwork. All Lucene configuration is defined in WEB-INF/config-lucene.xml." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:8 +msgid "In some cases it’s relevant to modify or extend the search fields of the metadata index. For example to add a field (which is then searchable or can be used in a default view) or change the content of the field is created from the metadata (indexation)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:11 +msgid "Adding a new field" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:13 +msgid "Each schema contains a file index-fields/default.xsl where the fields stored on the index are defined. This is an xslt that runs over the xml of the metadata and creates the different field tags that Lucene will recognize and process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:22 +msgid "This fields can then be used as parameters on the Q service, to search by that field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:24 +msgid "Remember that after every change on the index configuration, a new index should be rebuilt." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:27 +msgid "Summaries" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:29 +msgid "The Q service returns the list of search results, but also can return a summary of the results returned with the parameters \"buildSummary=true\" and \"summaryType=$summary\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:31 +msgid "This summary is a list of the most common values for certain fields. This summaries are defined on web/src/main/webapp/WEB-INF/config-summary.xml:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:39 +msgid "The items used on this summaries have to be defined on the upper tag called \"facets\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:42 +msgid "Boost fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:44 +msgid "Sometimes we want some field to be more relevant on the search than others. We can boost those fields inside the tag fieldBoosting .The boost is a positive or negative float value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/searchfields/index.rst:58 +msgid "See more on :ref:`configuring-search-fields`" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d649f9c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:4 +msgid "Adding new User Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:6 +msgid "To completely understand this part of the tutorial, it would be good to be familiarized with the :ref:`tuto-customui` tutorial first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:8 +msgid "In GeoNetwork you can have more than one style installed on the same deployment. You can select which style to use on the Settings manager. Also, you can use the parameter \"?view=$name\" to force a specific style on a page request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:11 +msgid "Create an empty style" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:13 +msgid "Now, we are going to create our custom style on the separated maven project we created before. First we define the minimal user interface customization so we can test that our style is being generated and used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:15 +msgid "We need an empty file on the custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/less/gn_search_custom.less path" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:17 +msgid "Then we need to define the basic Angular module that will be used on this style. Create a file on custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/module.js and add the following content:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:21 +msgid "(function() { goog.provide('gn_search_custom'); goog.require('gn_search'); var module = angular.module('gn_search_custom', ['gn_search']); })();" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:27 +msgid "Next we create a new file on custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/templates/index.html and add the following content:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:33 +msgid "Finally we have to tell the wro4j library where our files will be. Edit the file web-ui/src/main/resources/WEB-INF/classes/web-ui-wro-sources.xml and add our folders:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:48 +msgid "Now, if we build, deploy and enter GeoNetwork, we can use this new style called \"custom\": http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/catalog.search?view=custom" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:51 +msgid "Import default style" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:53 +msgid "You can import the default style to have an easy start on your new style." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:55 +msgid "Edit custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/less/gn_search_custom.less and add the following line:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:59 +msgid "@import \"gn_search_default.css\";" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:61 +msgid "Then make the Angular module dependant of the default Angular UI module. Edit custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/module.js and replace the contents with:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:65 +msgid "(function() { goog.provide('gn_search_custom'); goog.require('gn_search_default'); var module = angular.module('gn_search_custom', ['gn_search_default']); })();" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:72 +msgid "Finally, replace the file custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/templates/index.html with the contents of the file web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/default/templates/index.html" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:74 +msgid "You hace now a duplicate of the default style you can improve with your own customizations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:76 +msgid "One of the main advantages of having your code decoupled is that you can override some of the files that comes by default on the GeoNetwork user interface and this overriding will not collide with future upgrades of the code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:79 +msgid "Modify Search Results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:81 +msgid "One of the most common customizations on the styling of GeoNetwork is to modify the appearance of the search result list. We can point to a different template on the config.js file. Edit the file custom/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/config.js and modify the property searchSettings.resultViewTpls." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:91 +msgid "searchSettings.resultViewTpls = [{" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:86 +msgid "tplUrl: '../../catalog/views/custom/resultsview/' + 'partials/viewtemplates/grid.html', tooltip: 'Grid', icon: 'fa-th'" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:90 +msgid "}];" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:93 +msgid "And now we have to create the referenced file web-ui/src/main/resources/catalog/views/custom/resultsview/partials/viewtemplates/grid.html and use the template we want, like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:117 +msgid "
    " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:116 +msgid "
  • " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:115 +msgid "
    " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:105 +msgid "
    " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:109 +msgid "" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:111 +msgid "
    0\"" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:113 +msgid "title=\"{{md.status_text[0]}}\" class=\"gn-status gn-status-{{md.status[0]}}\">{{md.status_text[0]}}" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:115 +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:116 +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:117 +msgid "
    " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:118 +msgid "
    • " +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:119 +msgid "
" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/hookcustomizations/ui/index.rst:121 +msgid "We can define any class we want and reference it on the gn_search_default.css file to give it some styling." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ada3c0ec --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/index.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorials" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2da450b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.pot @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorial setting up an Atom/OpenSearch based INSPIRE download service" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:6 +msgid "This tutorial shows how one can set up GeoNetwork to provide download services following `technical guidelines for download services `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:8 +msgid "Note that the technical guidelines allow both Atom/OpenSearch as well as `WFS `_. This tutorial describes how to set up a download service using Atom/Opensearch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:10 +msgid "The basics of Atom/OpenSearch is that for each dataset a number of file-downloads in various flavours (language/projection/format) is available. These flavours are advertised in a \"Dataset Atom Feed\" document. A set of \"Dataset Atom Feed\" documents is grouped into a \"Service Atom Feed\" document. For each \"Service Atom Feed\" document an OpenSearchDescription document is available. A website can refer to this OpenSearchDescription document, which enables searching through the download service using the browser search bar (OpenSearch)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:13 +msgid "GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:15 +msgid "GeoNetwork implements OpenSearch on a set of Dataset- and Service Atom feeds. An OpenSearch Description document is generated for each Service Atom Feed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:17 +msgid "GeoNetwork will soon support an internal- and external mode." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:19 +msgid "in internal mode GeoNetwork will generate Atom files dynamically from metadata content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:21 +msgid "in external mode GeoNetwork will ingest Atom files that are linked to metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:23 +msgid "Currently only the external mode is fully supported. Atom files can be generated in any text or xml editor following the technical guidelines. To optimise the Atom support GeoNetwork uses a convention, which is currently not mandated by the technical guidelines. The convention is that any gmd:MD_Distribution having a link to an Atom file requires the protocol field to contain a defined value to indicate the distribution as being an Atom document. Default value for this protocol is INSPIRE-ATOM, but you can change it using Admin > Settings. The benefit of this approach is that GeoNetwork doesn't need to open any file-link to determine if it is an Atom File. We've seen various member states mandate this convention in localised INSPIRE Technical Guidelines." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:44 +msgid "When deploying Geonetwork, make sure the GEMET thesauri are loaded and activate the INSPIRE editor as described in `inspire configuration `_. In this file \"schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/loc/eng/labels.xml \" (and the same file in other languages in use in the catalogue) in the gmd:protocol helper (around line 2000) add the \"INSPIRE-ATOM\" protocol which is used to indicate links that link to an Atom file (only links having that protocol value will be ingested)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:46 +msgid "In Admin > Settings activate the INSPIRE extension and activate Atom harvesting (at certain interval). The settings page facilitates to set a protocol which is used in metadata to indicate an Atom link." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:50 +msgid "For each dataset that you are going to publish create an iso19115 record using the INSPIRE template. Link each record to the related atom file (or upload an atom file)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:54 +msgid "Make sure the metadata contains the same gmd:code as used in the Atom file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:56 +msgid "Now create a service metadata using the INSPIRE template and link it to the service Atom and the individual datasets (using srv:operatesOn)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:58 +msgid "Before you validate the implementation, run the Atom harvester in admin > settings manually. A panel will display the number of processed Atom feeds and any errors that may have occured while processing (more details in log file)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:61 +msgid "Validate the implementation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:63 +msgid "If you are running the above setup online, you can use the `pilot JRC INSPIRE validator `_. If the above setup is running locally, you can use `Esdin Test Framework `_ to validate the INSPIRE setup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-atom.rst:67 +msgid "Running the test frequently during development helps to identify issues in an early stage." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67ecb329 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.pot @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorial setting up a WFS based INSPIRE download service with GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:6 +msgid "This tutorial shows how one can set up a combination of GeoNetwork and Geoserver to provide download services following `technical guidelines for download services `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:8 +msgid "Note that the technical guidelines allow both Atom/OpenSearch as well as `WFS `_. This tutorial describes how to set up a download service using WFS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:11 +msgid "GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:13 +msgid "To support the INSPIRE data models the geoserver `\"appschema\" plugin `_ needs to be installed. Configuring appschema support in GeoServer is not the goal of this tutorial. Appschema support for INSPIRE is nicely documented by `Marcus Sen `_. Another valuable resource is available at `geosolutions `_. In this tutorial we'll focus on metadata aspects of a WFS download service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:15 +msgid "Download and install GeoServer INSPIRE extension as documented in `installing inspire extension `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:17 +msgid "Create at least one workspace per datamodel. On workspace properties activate \"Settings\" and set the selected service type (WFS)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:21 +msgid "On WFS settings, select the new workspace and fill out the form (keep service metadata url empty for now) as described in `using inspire extension `_. If the new workspace is not in the pull down, return to previous step and make sure \"Settings\" is activated for the workspace. If the INSPIRE fields are not visible, make sure the INSPIRE extension is correctly installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:25 +msgid "Create featuretypes according to the appschema documentation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:28 +msgid "GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:30 +msgid "When deploying Geonetwork, make sure the GEMET thesauri are loaded and activate the INSPIRE editor as described in `inspire documentation `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:32 +msgid "In Admin > Settings activate the INSPIRE extension." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:36 +msgid "For each dataset that you are going to publish create an iso19115 record using the INSPIRE template. Link each record to a download service as created in geoserver: eg https://{url}/geoserver/{workspace}/ows?request=getcapabilities&service=wfs&version=2.0.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:40 +msgid "Create an OGC harvester that is able to extract a metadata for service (iso19119) record from the WFS. Run the harvester and note down the identifier of the created service metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:43 +msgid "Return to GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:45 +msgid "For each layer add a metadata url to the layer configuration of type application/vnd.ogc.csw.GetRecordByIdResponse_xml." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:47 +msgid "On the WFS-settings > INSPIRE workspace add the link to the service metadata. In contradiction to WMS does WFS not link from a featuretype (layer) to metadata, in stead the links to dataset metadata have to be added as part of the extende INSPIRE capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:50 +msgid "Validate the implementation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:52 +msgid "If you are running the above setup online, you can use the `pilot JRC INSPIRE validator `_. If the above setup is running locally, you can use `Esdin Test Framework `_ to validate the INSPIRE setup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/download-geoserver.rst:56 +msgid "Running the test frequently during development helps to identify issues in an early stage." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ef3e213 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/index.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/index.rst:6 +msgid "The tutorials in this section target specific GeoNetwork implementation scenarios related to the `European INSPIRE Directive `_. INSPIRE mandates European organisations to set up view- and download services and to describe them using metadata in discovery services. To respond to all aspects of the technical guidelines requires to compose an infrastructure of various components. For now we provide tutorials for view services in `mapserver `_ and `geoserver `_ and download services using `Atom `_ and `geoserver `_." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..75ae9053 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.pot @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorial setting up INSPIRE view service with GeoNetwork and GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:6 +msgid "This tutorial shows how one can set up a combination of GeoServer and GeoNetwork to provide view services following `technical guidelines for view services `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:8 +msgid "Note that the technical guidelines allow both `WMS `_ as well as `WMTS `_. Select the service type which matches your use case or both. WMTS is generally the preferred choice for bigger datasets (facilitates to meet the quality of service requirements). WMS is generally the better choice for datasets with a high update frequency. GeoServer has improved its WMTS support in recent versions (2.10+). Older versions can not be used for providing WMTS according to INSPIRE technical guidelines." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:11 +msgid "GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:13 +msgid "Download and install GeoServer INSPIRE extension as documented in `installing inspire extension `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:15 +msgid "Create a workspace from which the INSPIRE layers will be hosted. On workspace properties activate \"Settings\" and set the selected services (WMS/WMTS). Limit the number of projections to the required INSPIRE projections. Keeping all default geoserver projections will cause serious performance issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:19 +msgid "On WMS/WMTS settings, select the INSPIRE workspace and fill out the form (keep service metadata url empty for now) as described in `using inspire extension `_. If the INSPIRE workspace is not in the pull down, return to previous step and make sure \"Settings\" is activated for the workspace. If the INSPIRE fields are not visible, make sure the INSPIRE extension is correctly installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:23 +msgid "Create layers as described in `layer management `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:28 +msgid "GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:30 +msgid "When deploying Geonetwork, make sure the GEMET thesauri are loaded and activate the INSPIRE editor as described in `inspire documentation `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:32 +msgid "In Admin > Settings activate the INSPIRE extension." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:36 +msgid "For each dataset that you are going to publish create an iso19115 record using the INSPIRE template. Link each record to the view service as created in geoserver: eg https://{url}/geoserver/{workspace}/ows?request=getcapabilities&service=wms&version=1.3.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:40 +msgid "Make sure the metadata contains the same gmd:code (and authority) as used in WMS getcapabilities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:42 +msgid "Create an OGC harvester that is able to extract a metadata for service (iso19119) record from the WM(T)S. Run the harvester and note down the identifier of the created service metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:45 +msgid "Return to GeoServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:47 +msgid "For each layer add a link to the metadata of type application/vnd.ogc.csw.GetRecordByIdResponse_xml." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:49 +msgid "On the WM(T)S-settings > INSPIRE workspace add a link to the service metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:52 +msgid "Validate the implementation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:54 +msgid "If you are running the above setup online, you can use the `pilot JRC INSPIRE validator `_. If the above setup is running locally, you can use `Esdin Test Framework `_ to validate the INSPIRE setup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:58 +msgid "Running the test frequently during development helps to identify issues in an early stage." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:61 +msgid "Known issues" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-geoserver.rst:63 +msgid "There is a known issue in the capabilities to metadata linkage. The JRC validator requires a gmd:RS_Identifier inside gmd:code having the authority and dataset identifier modeled separately. However the technical guidelines suggest a gmd:MD_Identifier inside gmd:code, the authority can then be included as a prefix, eg < gmd:MD_Identifier >{authority}#{uuid}< gmd:MD_Identifier >" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43cbd291 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:4 +msgid "Tutorial setting up INSPIRE view service with GeoNetwork and Mapserver" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:6 +msgid "This tutorial shows how one can set up a combination of `MapServer `_ and GeoNetwork to provide view services following `technical guidelines for view services `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:9 +msgid "MapServer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:11 +msgid "How to set up an INSPIRE view service in Mapserver is documented in `mapserver documentation `_. In this tutorial we use the reference service metadata approach:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:23 +msgid "GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:25 +msgid "When deploying Geonetwork, make sure the GEMET thesauri are loaded and activate the INSPIRE editor as described in `Geonetwork documentation `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:27 +msgid "In Admin > Settings activate the INSPIRE extension." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:31 +msgid "For each dataset that you are going to publish create an iso19115 record using the INSPIRE template. Link each record to the view service as created in mapserver: eg https://{url}/cgi-bin/mapserv?map={mapfile}&request=getcapabilities&service=wms&version=1.3.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:35 +msgid "Make sure the metadata contains the same gmd:code (and authority) as available in WMS getcapabilities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:37 +msgid "Create an OGC harvester that is able to extract a metadata for service (iso19119) record from the WMS. Run the harvester and note down the identifier of the created service metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:40 +msgid "Return to MapServer Mapfile" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:42 +msgid "For each layer configuration add a metadata url of type text/xml. Other relevant parameters are the authority element and the dataset identifier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:58 +msgid "For the service definition add a link to the service metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:73 +msgid "Validate the implementation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:75 +msgid "If you are running the above setup online, you can use the `pilot JRC INSPIRE validator `_. If the above setup is running locally, you can use `Esdin Test Framework `_ to validate the INSPIRE setup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:79 +msgid "Running the test frequently during development helps to identify issues in an early stage." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:82 +msgid "Known issues" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/inspire/view-mapserver.rst:84 +msgid "There is a known issue in the capabilities to metadata linkage. The JRC validator requires a gmd:RS_Identifier inside gmd:code having the authority and dataset identifier modeled separately. However the technical guidelines suggest a gmd:MD_Identifier inside gmd:code, the authority can then be included as a prefix, eg < gmd:MD_Identifier >{authority}#{uuid}< gmd:MD_Identifier >" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87f28e62 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:4 +msgid "(Optional) Build" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:6 +msgid "The source code of GeoNetwork is available on a public repository on `Github `_. This means that you can clone, fork and propose pushes of your custom changes. If you are not familiar with repositories of code or git, you should check `this quick manual `_." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:8 +msgid "GeoNetwork is built using `Maven version 3+ `_. It is written on **Java 7+**. It works both with OpenJDK or the Oracle version. There are several ways to install this on your local machine; for example if you have a Debian based OS (like Ubuntu), you can install them with just this command:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:14 +msgid "Make sure you installed maven version 3!!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:22 +msgid "Remember that this will also install java on your system. You can check that the version is the right one with the following command:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:28 +msgid "So, the very first step once you have your environment set up is clone the GeoNetwork repository on your local machine. That can be done on the command line using the following command inside an empty folder where the source code will be populated:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:38 +msgid "As you can see, all the source code shown on github is also available on your local machine now." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:40 +msgid "The source code of GeoNetwork is split on several smaller maven projects. To run GeoNetwork, you have to build all of them and run the project named **\"web\"**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:42 +msgid "If you are familiar to maven, you will probably have guessed that you have to run a package install command on the root folder of GeoNetwork source code. But if you try that, maven will warn you that for building GeoNetwork you need more memory than the default memory provided to maven. This means, you will have to export the maven options to increase the memory like this:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:48 +msgid "At this point we are not interested in running the tests, so you can skip them using the parameter *-DskipTests*:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:54 +msgid "At the end of this build (which can take long, depending on your network connection, as it has many third party libraries), you will see something like this:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:96 +msgid "This will generate a war file, which you can use in any Java Application Container (server) like Tomcat, on web/target/geonetwork.war" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:98 +msgid "Congratulations! You are ready to run GeoNetwork. To do this, just go to the web folder and run jetty in there:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/build.rst:104 +msgid "After jetty starts, you can see your running GeoNetwork by opening a browser and enter to http://localhost:8080/geonetwork" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40d5c3fb --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.pot @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:4 +msgid "Deployment using a war file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:6 +msgid "To deploy **GeoNetwork** you just have to place the war file provided or generated on the last optional step on a proper java container like Tomcat." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:8 +msgid "To install Tomcat on a debian-based operative system, you can use the apt-get tool like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:14 +msgid "Once you have Tomcat installed on your system, locate the webapps folder and place the geonetwork.war file there. This will deploy GeoNetwork on your system." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:16 +msgid "You need to ensure Tomcat is configured with enough memory for GeoNetwork to launch. This can be be configured via the ``setenv`` script in tomcat with the appropriate memory for the JAVA_OPTS property)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:18 +msgid "Another recommended step on deployment is changing the data directory. The data directory is where GeoNetwork stores all the data files like thumbnails or uploaded documents attached to metadata records. You can start with an empty GeoNetwork directory, it will be automatically populated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:20 +msgid "The easiest way to setup the data directory is to update the file **config-spring-geonetwork.xml** available inside the core project:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:32 +msgid "See more on :ref:`customizing-data-directory`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/deploy.rst:34 +msgid "You can make sure GeoNetwork is deployed on the following url: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..272954db --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/deployment/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/index.rst:4 +msgid "Deployment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/deployment/index.rst:6 +msgid "On this first step, we will learn how to make GeoNetwork run on your machine. The first step is optional and can be skip if you already have a geonetwork.war file. You can download a war file on `Sourceforge `_. There is also a `dockerized version of GeoNetwork `_ available." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf78e51c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:4 +msgid "Edit" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:6 +msgid "To add new metadata, you should enter the editor dashboard: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/catalog.edit#/board" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:10 +msgid "There, you can click on the blue \"Add new record\" button at the right to create a new metadata. Depending on the schema selected on previous steps, you will be offered different templates to start a new metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:14 +msgid "After selecting a template and clicking on the green \"Create\" button at the right, the editor will be opened with your newly created metadata. You can complete and change the values you need to and then click on the blue save icon." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:18 +msgid "After saving and closing the editor, you metadata is already on your catalog. You can search for it on the home page or the editor dashboard." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:20 +msgid "If you want your metadata to be publicly available, you should also modify the privileges so the \"All\" group, which represents the anonymous users, can see it. To do this, go back to the editor dashboard: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/catalog.edit#/board" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:24 +msgid "Select the metadata you want to publish and, on the top menu, select the \"Publish\" option. Now your metadata is publicly available on your catalog. If you access with an anonymous tab, your metadata is visible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/edit.rst:26 +msgid "See more on :ref:`editing-metadata`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f2383ae --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:4 +msgid "Customize Editor (Optional)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:6 +msgid "Each schema can configure different editor views. This configurations can be found on the file layout/config-editor.xml of each schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:8 +msgid "This file has four main blocks:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:10 +msgid "Fields:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:23 +msgid "This defines for each XSD defined type, which type of input to use. As with gmd:onLine, a customized angular input type can be defined." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:25 +msgid "After defining all the simple fields, we define a list of fieldsets, which the editor will recognize as something to put together:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:34 +msgid "Now we define what fields are multilingual. Usually most of the fields are multilingual, so we can just define which ones to exclude." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:49 +msgid "Finally, we define the views, which will customize which fields will be shown when editing the metadata. We can define more than one view per schema, so the editor user can select which one to use when editing the metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:51 +msgid "When a non-final field is defined on a view, the editor will automatically generate all the input fields inside it. So, you don't have to explicitly define all the fields you want to show. The simplest view is the one based on the XSD of the schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:53 +msgid "The xml view can also be easily defined:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:61 +msgid "If the view is too big, we can also define a set of tabs inside the editor, so not all fields are shown at the same time. Remember that when the user changes the tab, the content will be saved. So we should place related fields inside the same tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:63 +msgid "Remember that you have to restart the application container (Tomcat) every time you modify this file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/editor.rst:65 +msgid "See more on :ref:`creating-custom-editor:`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e06a796 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/edit/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/index.rst:4 +msgid "Editing Metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/edit/index.rst:6 +msgid "On this step we will learn how to edit metadata and configure the editor." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b74697d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:4 +msgid "Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:6 +msgid "The quickest way to add relevant data to your catalog is by harvesting. This means, copying data from other catalos in your own catalog. There are many protocols that can be used for harvesting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:9 +msgid "GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:11 +msgid "GeoNetwork can harvest from other GeoNetwork catalogs. For this tutorial, we are going to use this catalog: http://ide.siia.gov.ar/geonetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:13 +msgid "To add a new harvester, we have to enter the administration console: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/admin.console#/harvest" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:17 +msgid "We select the **GeoNetwork** option on the *Harvest from* dropdown. This will open a harvester editor at the right. We enter a *Node name* and the *Catalog URL* and we can already save it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:19 +msgid "All harvesters can be run manually at will with the *Harvest* button. This means, it will run just once every time an authorized user runs it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:21 +msgid "But the most interesting feature of harvesters is the scheduler. You can define a frequency of running." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:26 +msgid "CSW" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:28 +msgid "GeoNetwork can also harvest from CSW catalogs. The process is quite similar, but instead of choosing the GeoNetwork type of harvester, we chose the **OGC CSW 2.0.2** harvester type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:30 +msgid "For this tutorial, we are going to use the following catalog: http://nationaalgeoregister.nl/geonetwork/srv/eng/csw" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:32 +msgid "While the harvester is running, there will be an animated circle. Once the harvester has finished, the number of records harvested will be shown." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/harvesting/index.rst:36 +msgid "See more on :ref:`harvesting`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b9e105f --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/index.rst:4 +msgid "Introduction to GeoNetwork" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/index.rst:6 +msgid "This tutorial is a very simplified quickstart on GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/index.rst:16 +msgid "For ui customization see :ref:`tuto-customui`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.pot b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7d84eb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:4 +msgid "Setup" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:7 +msgid "Change Administrator Password" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:9 +msgid "The first step you should do after deploying GeoNetwork is login with the administrator user and change the administrator password. The default administrator user is called *admin* and the password is *admin*. Once you have logged in, you have to enter the administration console to configure the basics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:11 +msgid "Change your admin password here:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:13 +msgid "http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/admin.console#/organization/users?userOrGroup=admin" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:18 +msgid "Basic Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:20 +msgid "Then, go to the settings page:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:22 +msgid "http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/admin.console#/settings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:24 +msgid "There are a few configuration values here that should be changed like the url domain for your catalog, if it is going to use https or the title for your catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:28 +msgid "Make sure you use the hostname, port and protocol that your users will use to access the geoportal as this settings will be used to generate default urls like the ones shown on the sitemap." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:30 +msgid "Preferred protocol should be https as that will mean a secure navigation for your users but http is the default one for easy deployment and development. **No login should be made outside the https protocol** for security reasons. Using https protocol on a strict browser policy like on Firefox may mean that some http map services will be blocked and display an error if trying to be loaded on the map. This can be solved by using only https map services. As http is a deprecated protocol, this problem will be solved in time. Check with your map service provider to use https with a valid certificate for the map services." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:34 +msgid "The Catalogue Identifier should be a unique name on the whole internet. The default identifier is generated automatically by GeoNetwork and should be safe to use. Unless you have a better identifier, you can leave the one generated by default." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:37 +msgid "Loading Schemas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:39 +msgid "The last important thing to configure is what schemas are we going to use in our catalog. By default, GeoNetwork has already installed some of the most used schemas. These schemas have usually samples and templates you can easily add to your catalog on the administration console:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:41 +msgid "http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/admin.console#/metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:45 +msgid "Sample data has no use on real world catalogues, it is just used to show how the metadata should be filled in and how it will look like once the data is inserted on the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:47 +msgid "Templates, on the other hand, are needed if you want to edit metadata. Instead of using empty xml files for the metadata creation, a template is used when creating a new record. You can always import or harvest already created metadata instead of using the editor to create manually records if that fits your usecase." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:49 +msgid "One you add some templates, your catalog is ready to be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:52 +msgid "Creating Users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:54 +msgid "Although you can enable user self-registration, it is more usual to create the users manually, so you control exactly who have access to what. The catalog uses the concept of Users, Groups and User Profiles." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:56 +msgid "A User can be part of one or more Groups." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:57 +msgid "A User has a Role in a Group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:58 +msgid "The Administrator Role is not related to a Group as it relates to the whole platform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:60 +msgid "Users can have different roles in different groups. A role defines what tasks the user can perform:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:62 +msgid "Guest is a user that can see records on the group, but cannot modify them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:63 +msgid "Editor is a user that can create or edit records on the group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:64 +msgid "Reviewer is a user that can edit and publish records on the group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:65 +msgid "UserAdmin is a user that has administrative privileges over the records and users on the group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:67 +msgid "To add a new user to the GeoNetwork system you do the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:69 +msgid "Select the Administration button in the menu" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:70 +msgid "On the Administration page, select User management" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:71 +msgid "Click the button Add a new user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:72 +msgid "Provide the information required for the new user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:73 +msgid "Assign the correct profile" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:74 +msgid "Assign the user to a group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:75 +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:91 +msgid "Click on Save" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:79 +msgid "For each possible role, there is a list of groups. This way, a user can have different roles for different groups, allowing a user being a readonly guest on some group while being able to edit and review records on another group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:84 +msgid "Creating Groups" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:86 +msgid "To create new groups you should be logged on with an account that has Administrative privileges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:88 +msgid "Select the Administration button in the menu. On the Administration page, select Group management." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:89 +msgid "Select Add a new group. You may want to remove the Sample group;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:90 +msgid "Fill out the details. The email address will be used to send feedback on data downloads when they occur for resources that are part of the Group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:93 +msgid "Access privileges can be set per metadata record. You can define privileges on a per Group basis." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/tutorials/introduction/setup/index.rst:95 +msgid "See more on :ref:`configuring-the-catalog`." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/data.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/data.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39ab5381 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/data.pot @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:4 +msgid "Analyze and visualize data" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:7 +msgid "Data accessible using download services (WFS)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:9 +msgid "All datasets described in metadata records and accessible through a download services (ie WFS) can be analyzed to improve search and data visualization. The catalog collect WFS features and index them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:16 +msgid "Elasticsearch needs to be installed and configured (See :ref:`installing-index`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:19 +msgid "Once collected, filtering is available in the map viewer for this layer. The filter interface provides faceting and export capabilities. The map viewer tries to connect to a WFS service by subtituting WMS by WFS in the service URL. If a WFS service is responding with a feature type having the same name as the WMS, the filter panel provides the option to index the features. User needs to be identified to run the indexing task." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:28 +msgid "Once indexed, all users can access the filtering menu providing:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:30 +msgid "a full text search on all fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:32 +msgid "a control to display or not the heatmap" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:34 +msgid "facets on all fields (computing automatically range facet for numbers)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:36 +msgid "table action display all values" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:38 +msgid "filter action apply the filters to the WMS layers using SLD" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:44 +msgid "Click on the table menu to display the attributes. Double click a row in the table to zoom to a feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:51 +msgid "Spatial filters can also be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:58 +msgid "Feature type customization" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:60 +msgid "By default, the filter panel is generated from Elasticsearch index. But you customise it for a specific WFS Feature Type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:62 +msgid "The customisation is done by a JSON config inserted in the gmd:applicationProfile section of the online resource in the metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:64 +msgid "Here the options::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:96 +msgid "You can" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:98 +msgid "restrict the fields used for filter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:99 +msgid "specify your own ranges for numeric values" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:100 +msgid "set your label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:101 +msgid "manage tokenized fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/data.rst:102 +msgid "enable heatmap" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..629851f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/index.rst:4 +msgid "Analyzing data" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/metadata.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/metadata.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32adae29 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/analyzing/metadata.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/metadata.rst:4 +msgid "Statistics on catalog content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/analyzing/metadata.rst:6 +msgid "The administration panel provides statistics on search and on records in the catalog." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4aaca1f --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:4 +msgid "Associating resources" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:6 +msgid "A record can be associated with different types of resources using the associated resource panel. This section describes how it works." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:10 +msgid "In order to add or edit associated resources, open the editor. On the top right, manage associated resources with the wizard panel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:16 +msgid "This wizard provides access to easily create or delete associated resources. A list of currently attached resources grouped by types is also provided." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:19 +msgid "To add a new online resource, click on the top + caret." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/index.rst:24 +msgid "Different types of resources can be associated:" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f32a731 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.pot @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:4 +msgid "Linking a dataset with a service" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:7 +msgid "Metadata on dataset can be associated to metadata on services." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:10 +msgid "Add more details on how/why/encoding" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:12 +msgid "In a service metadata record, click the ``Link to a dataset`` button to open the record selector which list all datasets in the catalog. Optionally, the layer name may be define manually or from the list of the layers retrieved from the service (using the GetCapabilities)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:23 +msgid "In a dataset metadata record, click the ``Link to a service`` button to open the record selector which list all services in the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-dataset-or-service.rst:30 +msgid "When confirming the association, both records will be affected by the change (depending on user privileges - ie. current user may not be allowed to modify the target record)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f54d0513 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.pot @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.rst:4 +msgid "Associating documents" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.rst:6 +msgid "A record can be associated with documents using a URL." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-documents.rst:8 +msgid "Document could be an overview, a quality report, a website available in different formats (eg. png, jpg, pdf, html) on the web." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47457d32 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.pot @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:4 +msgid "Describing attributes table in a feature Catalog" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:7 +msgid "A feature catalog describes the data model of the dataset with the list of tables, attributes, definitions, list of values, ... Feature catalogs could be described:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:11 +msgid "as a document (eg. PDF) and linked to the metadata record (see :ref:`linking-online-resources-doc`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:13 +msgid "as a record and described using the ISO19110 standards." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:17 +msgid "Click on ``Link to a feature catalog`` to open the record selector listing all feature catalog described in the catalog. Choose one and submit to associate the 2 documents." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:26 +msgid "In ISO19115-3, the feature catalog can also be described directly in the metadata record in the ``content`` section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-feature-catalog.rst:31 +msgid "Add encoding" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7871e8d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.pot @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:4 +msgid "Linking website, web services, ... using URL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:6 +msgid "This section applies mainly to ISO19139 records and partially to Dublin Core (ie. only documents can be associated in Dublin Core) standards." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:13 +msgid "Linking a document" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:15 +msgid "2 approaches can be used to link documents:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:17 +msgid "by providing a URL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:19 +msgid "by uploading a document" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:22 +msgid "To add a new one, click on the + caret button then ``Add an online resource`` button or, if alreay one exists, just click on the title of the ``Online resources``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:30 +msgid "To link a URL, set the following properties:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:32 +msgid "``Protocol`` to describe the type of document attached (``Web address (URL)`` is the default)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:33 +msgid "``Linkage`` to point to the target document. It can be any type of links like http://, ftp://, file:///, ..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:34 +msgid "``Name`` is optional and provides a label for making an hyperlink" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:35 +msgid "``Description`` is optional and provides more details about the link" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:39 +msgid "To upload a document, switch to the ``Upload`` tab and choose a document, or drag and drop it in the pop up. In that case, the protocol is hidden and is set to ``WWW:DOWNLOAD``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:47 +msgid "Depending on your needs, more specific links could be added and will be associated to different actions and display in the applications." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:54 +msgid "Linking a WMS layer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:57 +msgid "To be able to view a record on the map viewer, it may be relevant to add a reference to one or more WMS services publishing the dataset. An online resource is encoded using the following in ISO19139:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:84 +msgid "To add a WMS layer:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:86 +msgid "choose the protocol ``OGC:WMS Web Map Service``," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:87 +msgid "set the URL of the service," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:88 +msgid "then the wizzard query the service to retrieve the list of layers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:89 +msgid "choose one or more layer in the list or set it manually." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:100 +msgid "Linking a database table or a GIS file on the network" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:102 +msgid "To reference a GIS file or a database table, user can upload or link to a that resource (see :ref:`linking-online-resources-doc`). The type of protocol depends on the type of resource associated:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:108 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:116 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:124 +msgid "Type of resource" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:108 +msgid "Vector file uploaded (eg. zipped Shapefile)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:110 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:118 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:126 +msgid "URL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:110 +msgid "File URL created after upload on the catalog. eg. http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/resources.get?id=1631&fname=CCM.zip&access=private" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:111 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:119 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:127 +msgid "Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:111 +msgid "WWW:DOWNLOAD" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:112 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:120 +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:128 +msgid "Name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:112 +msgid "File name (readonly)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:116 +msgid "Vector file on the network" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:118 +msgid "File path. eg. file:///shared/geodata/world/hydrology/rivers.shp" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:119 +msgid "FILE:GEO or FILE:RASTER" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:120 +msgid "File description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:124 +msgid "Vector (Table PostGIS)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:126 +msgid "jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/login:password@db" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:127 +msgid "DB:POSTGIS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:128 +msgid "Table name" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:132 +msgid "When having information about the database or file on the local network, it may be relevant to hide those informations for public users (see :ref:`restricting-information-to-metadata-sections`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-online-resources.rst:137 +msgid "Add doc & link to geopublisher" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1271c72 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.pot @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.rst:4 +msgid "Other types of resources (eg. sensor, publication)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-others.rst:7 +msgid "Add aggregates details" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53feaa93 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.pot @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:4 +msgid "Grouping datasets in a series (ie. parent/child relation)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:7 +msgid "In some situations, a dataset is part of a temporal or spatial collections of records which could share the same specification (eg. Land cover for different years). In order to group this set of records, a general description of the collection may be done in the parent metadata which can then be attached to each dataset of the series." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:12 +msgid "Corine Land Cover" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:14 +msgid "Corine Land Cover 2002" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:15 +msgid "Corine Land Cover 2012" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:16 +msgid "..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:18 +msgid "Parent/child relations can be set on ISO19139 and Dublin Core records. In ISO19139, the link to a parent record is encoded in the child record using the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:29 +msgid "Parent/Child relation in ISO19139 may also be encoded using aggregates (see :ref:`linking-others`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:32 +msgid "When creating such relationship, users will be able to navigate between the records in the search and record view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-parent.rst:38 +msgid "Click on ``Link to parent`` to access the panel providing a simple search to select the target parent metadata" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-records.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-records.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46e57237 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-records.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-records.rst:4 +msgid "Associating another record" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-source.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-source.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0e3fc69 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-source.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-source.rst:4 +msgid "Referencing sources of a dataset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-source.rst:6 +msgid "When a dataset is created from another or when a map is composed of datasets, editors could indicate this relationship in the quality section of the record (using standard ISO19139 or ISO19115-3) by adding sources." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b6d2f804 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:5 +msgid "Illustrating with an overview" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:8 +msgid "To help the user identify a metadata record of interest, you can create a graphic overview (or thumbnail) in the form of an image and attach it to the metadata record. For example, if your metadata record describes some geographic dataset then the graphic overview could be an image of the map with legend produced by an OGC Web Map Service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:14 +msgid "You can associate one or more overviews with a record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:17 +msgid "Thumbnails are displayed in search results and metadata view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:22 +msgid "From the ``Associated resources`` panel, click on the ``Add a document`` button to open the ``Link an online resource to the current metadata`` wizard. Thumbnails can be added using 3 sources:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:26 +msgid "From a URL on the web" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:28 +msgid "From a file attached to the metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:30 +msgid "From a file generated using a visualization service" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:38 +msgid "Linking an overview with a URL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:40 +msgid "When the overview is available as an image on the web, it could be directly linked to the metadata record. Add an optional description to describe the image:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:45 +msgid "If the overview is not available, attache an image (png, gif, jpeg) within the filestore (see :ref:`associating_resources_filestore`) and click its name to set the URL:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:52 +msgid "You can link as many images as you want. Images associated in this mode, should be publicly accessible on the web if you want the overviews to be displayed properly even if that metadata record get harvested by other catalogs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:64 +msgid "Generating a thumbnail using WMS layers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/linking-thumbnail.rst:67 +msgid "If you have registered a WMS layer in the current metadata record (see :ref:`linking-wms-layer`), a thumbnail can be generated using it on top of the base layer map. Choose the ``Create thumbnail`` tab and choose the area to be print on the thumbnail. The image created is added to the filestore." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb2c6191 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:4 +msgid "Uploading attachments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:8 +msgid "If documents are not available, editors can upload attachments to a metadata record. The document is added to the filestore. The filestore can contains any kind of files." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:15 +msgid "To upload a file, click the button and choose a file or drag&drop a file on the button. Files are stored in a folder in the data directory (see :ref:`customizing-data-directory`). There is one folder per metadata containing:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:19 +msgid "``public`` folder with files accessible to all users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:21 +msgid "``private`` folder with files accessible to identified user with download privilege (see :ref:`managing-privileges`)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:25 +msgid "From the filestore:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:27 +msgid "click the file name to set the URL for the current document to attach" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:29 +msgid "click the eye icon to view the document" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:31 +msgid "click the locker to change the document visibility" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:33 +msgid "click the cross to remove the file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:36 +msgid "A file uploaded in this way will be exported in the metadata export file (MEF). Therefore, its URL will not be automatically added to the metadata. The URL is added when attaching the document to a specific element in the metadata (eg. overview, quality report, legend)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:44 +msgid "Filestore configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/associating-resources/using-filestore.rst:46 +msgid "By default, the maximum file size is set to 100Mb. This limit is set in :code:`/services/src/main/resources/config-spring-geonetwork.xml` with the parameter ``maxUploadSize``." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..847406e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.pot @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:4 +msgid "Creating a new record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:6 +msgid "This section guides you through the process of adding new metadata records with associated data and/or services into the catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:10 +msgid "To add or edit metadata, user must have an ``editor`` profile or higher. That user should be a member of a group you want to add information for. Contact your administrator if you don't have the correct profile." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:14 +msgid "From the home page, go to the *contribute* section or directly click on ``add new record`` menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:21 +msgid "Then, start with a metadata template (see :ref:`creating-templates`), choose a group and click *create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:27 +msgid "Note: If only one group is defined in the catalog, the default group will be selected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/creating-metadata.rst:31 +msgid "The next step is to fill out properly the fields provided by default in the template and probably prepare an image of your data to illustrate it in the search results." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2530d680 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.pot @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:4 +msgid "Deleting a record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:6 +msgid "User must have editing privileges to be able to remove a record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:8 +msgid "There are different ways to remove a record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:10 +msgid "In the record view, click the ``delete`` menu" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:11 +msgid "From the search results, select on or more records and select ``delete`` in the ``actions on selection`` menu" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:13 +msgid "In the ``contribute`` section click the ``delete`` button for a record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/deleting-metadata.rst:17 +msgid "Note, that if a metadata originates from a harvester, that metadata will automatically be removed when the metadata in the harvested system is removed or the harvester itself is removed and the record will be inserted again on the next harvester run." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f24ddd7a --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.pot @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:4 +msgid "Editing metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:7 +msgid "This section describes how to use the metadata editor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:10 +msgid "Using the editor toolbar" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:12 +msgid "The top tool bar provides the main editor actions:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:16 +msgid "From left to right:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:18 +msgid "Set metadata categories" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:19 +msgid "Set metadata group" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:20 +msgid "Advanced features (eg. versioning)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:21 +msgid "``Valdate`` to run metadata validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:22 +msgid "``Cancel`` to cancel all changes made since the beginning of the editing session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:23 +msgid "``Save & Close`` to save and close the editor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:24 +msgid "``Save`` to save the metadata or the template. The drowdown also allows to set if the edits are minor or not (ie. the change date of the metadata will not be updated if case of minor edits)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:27 +msgid "Change view mode for the editor form, enable tooltips or switch to advanced editor mode" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:32 +msgid "Navigating the form" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:34 +msgid "To describe the resource, editor can use the form which provides different views. By default the editor provides:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:37 +msgid "a ``simple view`` displaying all fields from the metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:38 +msgid "a ``full view`` based on the metadata standard and providing access to all descriptors from the standards" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:40 +msgid "an *XML view** displaying the record as an XML document" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:42 +msgid "To switch from one view to another, use the following menu:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:47 +msgid "Once the view selected, user can browse the list of fields to populate. He can also use the scroll spy on the lower right corner to quickly access a section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:52 +msgid "The scroll spy highlight the visible sections, help user to return to the top of the form and can be minimized if needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:59 +msgid "Populating fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:0 +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:62 +msgid "Add details about add/remove/directory controls" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:63 +msgid "Add details about directory / thesaurus" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/editing-metadata.rst:66 +msgid "Depending on the view configuration (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor`), editor can reorder elements using up and down control." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5f8e4e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.pot @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:4 +msgid "Importing a new record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:6 +msgid "An editor can import metadata in the catalog file in different formats: XML, MEF or ZIP (see :ref:`mef_format`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:12 +msgid "The user needs to have an ``editor`` profile to access it. After login, go to the contribute page and select the ``Import new records`` button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:18 +msgid "The import new records page allows you to import records in three ways:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:20 +msgid "choose ``Upload a file from your computer`` and choose one XML or MEF file to load" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:21 +msgid "choose ``Copy/Paste`` and copy the XML document in the textarea" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:22 +msgid "choose ``Import a set of files from a folder on the server`` and set the path of the folder in the server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:25 +msgid "To import multiple file at a time, use the MEF format or the import from server options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:27 +msgid "After defining the type of import, configure the other import settings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:31 +msgid "``Type of file``: when uploading or loading file from the server, define the type of file to load. It could be XML for importing XML document or MEF (equivalent to ZIP) for importing MEF format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:35 +msgid "``Type of record``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:37 +msgid "``Metadata`` should be used when loading a normal metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:38 +msgid "``Template`` should be used when the loaded metadata record will be used as a template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:41 +msgid "``Record identifier processing`` determines how to handle potential clashes between the UUID of the record loaded and UUIDs of metadata records already present in the catalog. 3 strategies are available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:45 +msgid "``None``: the UUID of the record loaded is left unchanged. If a metadata record with the same UUID is already present in the catalog, an error message is returned." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:49 +msgid "``Overwrite metadata with same UUID``: any existing metadata record in the catalog having the same UUID as the loaded record will be updated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:52 +msgid "``Generate UUID for inserted metadata``: a new UUID is affected to the loaded record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:55 +msgid "``Apply XSLT conversion`` allows to transform the record loaded using an XSLT stylesheet. A list of predefined transformations is provided. The selected transformation should be compatible with the standard of the loaded record (see :ref:`customizing-xslt-conversion`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:60 +msgid "``Validate`` trigger the validation of the record before loading it. In case of error the record is rejected and an error reported." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:63 +msgid "``Assign to current catalog`` assign the current catalog as origin for the record, in case the MEF file indicate another source." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:66 +msgid "``Assign to Group`` define the group of the loaded record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:68 +msgid "``Assign to Category`` define a local category to assign to the loaded record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:71 +msgid "Click ``import`` to trigger the import. After processing, a summary is provided with the following details:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:74 +msgid "the total count of imported metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:75 +msgid "errors messages" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/importing-metadata.rst:76 +msgid "if only one record is imported, a link to that record is provided." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ce28844 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:4 +msgid "Describing information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:6 +msgid "This section describes how to catalog resources. First, user needs to choose a standard to use. In general, the following rules apply:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:9 +msgid "`Dublin core `_ usually used for opendata portal, referencing publication, report, ..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:11 +msgid "`ISO 19115/119/139 `_ used for spatial resources (eg. datasets, services, maps)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:13 +msgid "`ISO 19110 `_ used for feature attribute table" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:17 +msgid "The editor form provides uploading of data, graphics, documents, pdf files and any other content type. It supports among other:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:20 +msgid "full standard support" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:21 +msgid "multilingual metadata editing," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:22 +msgid "validation system," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:23 +msgid "suggestion system to improve metadata quality" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:24 +msgid "geopublication of layers to publish geodata layers in OGC services (eg. GeoServer)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:27 +msgid "Add links to corresponding section" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/index.rst:41 +msgid "Based on user profiles (see :ref:`creating-user`), a dashboard provides easy access to their informations and tasks." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68df57ad --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.pot @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:4 +msgid "Creating templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:6 +msgid "Templates are metadata records that you can use when starting describing a new resources. This section describe how to load and manage templates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:10 +msgid "Creating and managing templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:12 +msgid "Templates are managed similarly in the catalog as metadata records, but they have a special 'template'-tag. They can be created, updated and removed in the ``contribute`` section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:17 +msgid "Metadata records can be converted to templates and vice versa at any time from the metadata editor using the ``save as template`` button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:23 +msgid "Templates can be assigned to limited groups, so only these groups can use the template in their work process (See :ref:`managing-privileges`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:28 +msgid "Loading default templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:30 +msgid "The ``Metadata and Templates`` page in the Administration page allows to see available standards." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:36 +msgid "From that page, user can for each standards:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:38 +msgid "load default samples" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:39 +msgid "load default templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:41 +msgid "... if any provided in the schema plugin." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:45 +msgid "You have to be logged in as an administrator to access this page and function." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:50 +msgid "Importing templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:52 +msgid "Another way of loading templates, is to use the metadata import page where XML files can be imported and selecting the type of record: ``template``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:60 +msgid "Creating your own templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:62 +msgid "Each standard provides defaults samples but you should consider spending some times on building your own template in order to make editing task as easy as possible depending on:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:66 +msgid "the type of resources to describe (eg. template for paper maps)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:67 +msgid "the structure of your organization (eg. defining templates per services)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:68 +msgid "the type of usage of the metadata (eg. public use, internal use, data quality)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:69 +msgid "the type of users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:70 +msgid "..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:73 +msgid "In a template, you should try to:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:75 +msgid "set as many default values as you can (eg. define default contact)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:76 +msgid "create elements that your encoding guideline recommend (to not spend time on searching elements in the advanced view)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:78 +msgid "provide instructions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:80 +msgid "The main goal is to guide editor work without requiring too much knowledge of the standard use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/managing-templates.rst:83 +msgid "For further customization, you could improve the schema plugin by defining custom documentation, recommended values, ... (see :ref:`implementing-a-schema-plugin`) or creating custom view (see :ref:`creating-custom-editor`)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8668210 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.pot @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:5 +msgid "Multilingual editing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:7 +msgid "Some standards support multilingual metadata (eg. ISO19139, ISO19115-1). A default template is provided for ISO19139 but user could easily add translation to an existing record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:11 +msgid "To declare a new language in a metadata record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:13 +msgid "First check, the main language is defined in the metadata section" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:15 +msgid "then add one or more languages in the other language in the metadata section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:18 +msgid "Once done, the editor form provides one field per languages declared. 2 types of layout is available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:21 +msgid "One field per language displayed one below the others (eg. default mode for title) in order to quickly have a look to all translations available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:24 +msgid "One field per language with the list of language to switch from one language to another." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:28 +msgid "User can switch from one mode to another using the ``all`` link." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:30 +msgid "When loading the editor, the selected language is the user interface language used if the language is defined in the current record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:34 +msgid "When viewing the record, if a translation exist in the user interface language, this translation is used, if not, the main metadata language is used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/describing-information/multilingual-editing.rst:37 +msgid "Note: This behaviour also applied to multilingual ISO19139 records requested in dublin core from the CSW services." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/export/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/export/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d754e31a --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/export/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:4 +msgid "Exporting records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:6 +msgid "GeoNetwork has three different export options to export metadata. They operate on selected sets of metadata from the search results. As such they are accessible from the \"actions on selection\" menu as shown in the following example:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:11 +msgid "Export as a ZIP archive" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:13 +msgid "When a selected set of metadata records is exported as a ZIP archive, each metadata record is inserted in the ZIP archive as a directory containing the metadata, any data uploaded with the metadata record and the thumbnails. This type of ZIP archive is the MEF (Metadata Exchange Format) Version 2.0. You can find more details of MEF V2 in the GeoNetwork Developers Manual." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:16 +msgid "Export as a CSV file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:18 +msgid "When a selected set of metadata records is exported as a CSV/TXT file, the following process takes place for each metadata record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:20 +msgid "a brief summary of some of the elements from each selected metadata record is generated by applying the brief template from the metadata schema eg. for an iso19139 metadata record the brief template from ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/present/metadata-iso19139.xsl`` would be applied to the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:21 +msgid "the elements common to the brief summary elements for all metadata records are extracted (as they may differ according to the metadata schema)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:22 +msgid "a title record with comma separated element names is created" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:23 +msgid "the content of each element is laid out in comma separated form. Where there is more than one child element in the brief element (eg. for geoBox), the content from each child element is separated using '###'." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:25 +msgid "An example of an ISO metadata record in CSV format is shown as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:32 +msgid "It is possible to override the brief summary of metadata elements by creating a special template in the presentation XSLT of the metadata schema. As an example of how to do this, we will override the brief summary for the iso19139 schema and replace it with just one element: gmd:title. To do this we create an XSLT template as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/export/index.rst:46 +msgid "This template, when added to ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/present/metadata-iso19139.xsl``, will replace the brief summary (produced by the brief template) with just one element, gmd:title." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b458b38 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.pot @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:4 +msgid "Harvesting CSW services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:6 +msgid "This harvester will connect to a remote CSW server and retrieve metadata records that match the query parameters specified." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a CSW harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:11 +msgid "The figure above shows the options available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:13 +msgid "**Site** - Options about the remote site." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the remote site. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this instance of the CSW harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:16 +msgid "*Service URL* - The URL of the capabilities document of the CSW server to be harvested. eg. http://geonetwork-site.com/srv/eng/csw?service=CSW&request=GetCabilities&version=2.0.2. This document is used to discover the location of the services to call to query and retrieve metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:17 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing harvested metadata records in the search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:18 +msgid "*Use account* - Account credentials for basic HTTP authentication on the CSW server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:20 +msgid "**Search criteria** - Using the Add button, you can add several search criteria. You can query only the fields recognised by the CSW protocol." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:22 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:26 +msgid "**Options** - Specific harvesting options for this harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:28 +msgid "*Validate* - If checked, the metadata will be validated after retrieval. If the validation does not pass, the metadata will be skipped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:30 +msgid "**Privileges** - Assign privileges to harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:34 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-csw.rst:39 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b89f6223 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.pot @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:4 +msgid "Local File System Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:6 +msgid "This harvester will harvest metadata as XML files from a filesystem available on the machine running the GeoNetwork server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a Local File System harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:11 +msgid "The figure above shows the options available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:13 +msgid "**Site** - Options about the remote site." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the filesystem harvester. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this instance of the Local Filesystem harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:16 +msgid "*Directory* - The path name of the directory containing the metadata (as XML files) to be harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:17 +msgid "*Recurse* - If checked and the *Directory* path contains other directories, then the harvester will traverse the entire file system tree in that directory and add all metadata files found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:18 +msgid "*Keep local if deleted at source* - If checked then metadata records that have already been harvested will be kept even if they have been deleted from the *Directory* specified." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:19 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing harvested metadata records in the search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:21 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:25 +msgid "**Harvested Content** - Options that are applied to harvested content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:27 +msgid "*Apply this XSLT to harvested records* - Choose an XSLT here that will convert harvested records to a different format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:28 +msgid "*Validate* - If checked, the metadata will be validated after retrieval. If the validation does not pass, the metadata will be skipped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:30 +msgid "**Privileges** - Assign privileges to harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:34 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:39 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-filesystem.rst:40 +msgid "in order to be successfully harvested, metadata records retrieved from the file system must match a metadata schema in the local GeoNetwork instance" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geonetwork.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geonetwork.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50109020 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geonetwork.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geonetwork.rst:4 +msgid "GeoNetwork 2.0 Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geonetwork.rst:6 +msgid "GeoNetwork 2.1 introduced a new powerful harvesting engine which is not compatible with GeoNetwork version 2.0 based catalogues. Old 2.0 servers can still harvest from 2.1 servers but harvesting metadata from a v2.0 server requires this harvesting type. Due to the fact that GeoNetwork 2.0 was released more than 5 years ago, this harvesting type is deprecated." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a90264e --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.pot @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:4 +msgid "GeoPortal REST Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:6 +msgid "This harvester will connect to a remote GeoPortal version 9.3.x or 10.x server and retrieve metadata records that match the query parameters specified using the GeoPortal REST API." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a GeoPortal REST harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:11 +msgid "The figure above shows the options available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:13 +msgid "**Site** - Options about the remote site." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the remote site. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this instance of the GeoPortal REST harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:16 +msgid "*Base URL* - The base URL of the GeoPortal server to be harvested. eg. http://yourhost.com/geoportal. The harvester will add the additional path required to access the REST services on the GeoPortal server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:17 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing harvested metadata records in the search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:19 +msgid "**Search criteria** - Using the Add button, you can add several search criteria. You can query any field on the GeoPortal server using the Lucene query syntax described at http://webhelp.esri.com/geoportal_extension/9.3.1/index.htm#srch_lucene.htm." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:21 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:25 +msgid "**Harvested Content** - Options that are applied to harvested content." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:27 +msgid "*Apply this XSLT to harvested records* - Choose an XSLT here that will convert harvested records to a different format. See notes section below for typical usage." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:28 +msgid "*Validate* - If checked, the metadata will be validated after retrieval. If the validation does not pass, the metadata will be skipped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:30 +msgid "**Privileges** - Assign privileges to harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:34 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:39 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:43 +msgid "this harvester uses two REST services from the GeoPortal API:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:45 +msgid "``rest/find/document`` with searchText parameter to return an RSS listing of metadata records that meet the search criteria (maximum 100000)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:46 +msgid "``rest/document`` with id parameter from each result returned in the RSS listing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:48 +msgid "this harvester has been tested with GeoPortal 9.3.x and 10.x. It can be used in preference to the CSW harvester if there are issues with the handling of the OGC standards etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-geoportal.rst:50 +msgid "typically ISO19115 metadata produced by the Geoportal software will not have a 'gmd' prefix for the namespace ``http://www.isotc211.org/2005/gmd``. GeoNetwork XSLTs will not have any trouble understanding this metadata but will not be able to map titles and codelists in the viewer/editor. To fix this problem, please select the `Add-gmd-prefix` XSLT for the *Apply this XSLT to harvested records* in the **Harvested Content** set of options described earlier" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5174975 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.pot @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:4 +msgid "OAIPMH Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:6 +msgid "This is a harvesting protocol that is widely used among libraries. GeoNetwork implements version 2.0 of the protocol." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:10 +msgid "Adding an OAI-PMH harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:12 +msgid "An OAI-PMH server implements a harvesting protocol that GeoNetwork, acting as a client, can use to harvest metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:15 +msgid "Configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:17 +msgid "**Site** - Options describing the remote site." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:19 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the remote site. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this instance of the OAIPMH harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:20 +msgid "*URL* - The URL of the OAI-PMH server from which metadata will be harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:21 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:22 +msgid "*Use account* - Account credentials for basic HTTP authentication on the OAIPMH server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:24 +msgid "**Search criteria** - This allows you to select metadata records for harvest based on certain criteria:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:26 +msgid "*From* - You can provide a start date here. Any metadata whose last change date is equal to or greater than this date will be harvested. To add or edit a value for this field you need to use the icon alongside the text box. This field is optional so if you don't provide a start date the constraint is dropped. Use the icon to clear the field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:27 +msgid "*Until* - Functions in the same way as the *From* parameter but adds an end constraint to the last change date search. Any metadata whose last change data is less than or equal to this data will be harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:28 +msgid "*Set* - An OAI-PMH server classifies metadata into sets (like categories in GeoNetwork). You can request all metadata records that belong to a set (and any of its subsets) by specifying the name of that set here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:29 +msgid "*Prefix* - 'Prefix' means metadata format. The oai_dc prefix must be supported by all OAI-PMH compliant servers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:30 +msgid "You can use the Add button to add more than one Search Criteria set. Search Criteria sets can be removed by clicking on the small cross at the top left of the set." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:32 +msgid "the 'OAI provider sets' drop down next to the *Set* text box and the 'OAI provider prefixes' drop down next to the *Prefix* textbox are initially blank. After specifying the connection URL, you can press the **Retrieve Info** button, which will connect to the remote OAI-PMH server, retrieve all supported sets and prefixes and fill the drop downs with these values. Selecting a value from either of these drop downs will fill the appropriate text box with the selected value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:35 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling Options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:39 +msgid "**Privileges**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:43 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:49 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:51 +msgid "if you request the oai_dc output format, GeoNetwork will convert it to Dublin Core format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:52 +msgid "when you edit a previously created OAIPMH harvester instance, both the *set* and *prefix* drop down lists will be empty. You have to press the retrieve info button again to connect to the remote server and retrieve set and prefix information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-oaipmh.rst:53 +msgid "the id of the remote server must be a UUID. If not, metadata can be harvested but during hierarchical propagation id clashes could corrupt harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70721b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.pot @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:4 +msgid "Harvesting OGC Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:6 +msgid "An OGC service implements a GetCapabilities operation that GeoNetwork, acting as a client, can use to produce metadata for the service (ISO19119) and resources delivered by the service (ISO19115/19139). This harvester supports the following OGC services and versions:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:8 +msgid "Web Map Service (WMS) - versions 1.0.0, 1.1.1, 1.3.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:9 +msgid "Web Feature Service (WFS) - versions 1.0.0 and 1.1.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:10 +msgid "Web Coverage Service (WCS) - version 1.0.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:11 +msgid "Web Processing Service (WPS) - version 0.4.0 and 1.0.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:12 +msgid "Catalogue Services for the Web (CSW) - version 2.0.2" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:13 +msgid "Sensor Observation Service (SOS) - version 1.0.0" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:16 +msgid "Adding an OGC Service Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:18 +msgid "Configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:20 +msgid "**Site**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:22 +msgid "*Name* - The name of the catalogue and will be one of the search criteria." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:23 +msgid "*Type* - The type of OGC service indicates if the harvester has to query for a specific kind of service. Supported type are WMS (1.0.0, 1.1.1, 1.3.0), WFS (1.0.0 and 1.1.0), WCS (1.0.0), WPS (0.4.0 and 1.0.0), CSW (2.0.2) and SOS (1.0.0)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:24 +msgid "*Service URL* - The service URL is the URL of the service to contact (without parameters like \"REQUEST=GetCapabilities\", \"VERSION=\", ...). It has to be a valid URL like http://your.preferred.ogcservice/type_wms." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:25 +msgid "*Metadata language* - Required field that will define the language of the metadata. It should be the language used by the OGC web service administrator." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:26 +msgid "*ISO topic category* - Used to populate the topic category element in the metadata. It is recommended to choose one as the topic category is mandatory for the ISO19115/19139 standard if the hierarchical level is \"datasets\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:27 +msgid "*Type of import* - By default, the harvester produces one service metadata record. Check boxes in this group determine the other metadata that will be produced." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:29 +msgid "*Create metadata for layer elements using GetCapabilities information*: Checking this option means that the harvester will loop over datasets served by the service as described in the GetCapabilities document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:30 +msgid "*Create metadata for layer elements using MetadataURL attributes*: Checkthis option means that the harvester will generate metadata from an XML document referenced in the MetadataUrl attribute of the dataset in the GetCapabilities document. If the document referred to by this attribute is not valid (eg. unknown schema, bad XML format), the GetCapabilites document is used as per the previous option." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:31 +msgid "*Create thumbnails for WMS layers*: If harvesting from an OGC WMS, then checking this options means that thumbnails will be created during harvesting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:33 +msgid "*Target schema* - The metadata schema of the dataset metadata records that will be created by this harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:34 +msgid "*Icon* - The default icon displayed as attribution logo for metadata created by this harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:36 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling Options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:40 +msgid "**Privileges**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:44 +msgid "**Category for service** - Metadata for the harvested service is assigned to the category selected in this option (eg. \"interactive resources\")." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:46 +msgid "**Category for datasets** - Metadata for the harvested datasets is assigned to the category selected in this option (eg. \"datasets\")." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:49 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:51 +msgid "every time the harvester runs, it will remove previously harvested records and create new records. GeoNetwork will generate the uuid for all metadata (both service and datasets). The exception to this rule is dataset metadata created using the MetadataUrl tag is in the GetCapabilities document, in that case, the uuid of the remote XML document is used instead" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:52 +msgid "thumbnails can only be generated when harvesting an OGC Web Map Service (WMS). The WMS should support the WGS84 projection" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-ogcwxs.rst:53 +msgid "the chosen *Target schema* must have the support XSLTs which are used by the harvester to convert the GetCapabilities statement to metadata records from that schema. If in doubt, use iso19139." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba1c0d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.pot @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:4 +msgid "Harvesting an ARCSDE Node" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:6 +msgid "This is a harvesting protocol for metadata stored in an ArcSDE installation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:9 +msgid "Adding an ArcSDE harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:11 +msgid "The harvester identifies the ESRI metadata format: ESRI ISO, ESRI FGDC to apply the required xslts to transform metadata to ISO19139. Configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:13 +msgid "**Identification**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the node. It will be shown in the harvesting main page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:16 +msgid "*Group* - User admin of this group and catalog administrator can manage this node." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:17 +msgid "*Harvester user* - User that owns the harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:19 +msgid "**Schedule** - Schedule configuration to execute the harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:21 +msgid "**Configuration for protocol ArcSDE**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:23 +msgid "*Server* - ArcSde server IP address or name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:24 +msgid "*Port* - ArcSde service port (typically 5151) or ArcSde database port, depending on the connection type selected, see below the *Connection type* section." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:25 +msgid "*Database name* - ArcSDE instance name (typically esri_sde)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:26 +msgid "*ArcSde version* - ArcSde version to harvest. The data model used by ArcSde is different depending on the ArcSde version." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:46 +msgid "*Connection type*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:28 +msgid "*ArcSde service* - Uses the ArcSde service to retrieve the metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:30 +msgid "Additional installation steps are required to use the ArcSDE harvester because it needs proprietary ESRI java api jars to be installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:32 +msgid "ArcSDE java API libraries need to be installed by the user in GeoNetwork (folder INSTALL_DIR_GEONETWORK/WEB-INF/lib), as these are proprietary libraries not distributed with GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:35 +msgid "The following jars are required:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:37 +msgid "jpe_sdk.jar" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:38 +msgid "jsde_sdk.jar" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:40 +msgid "dummy-api-XXX.jar must be removed from INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/lib" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:42 +msgid "*Database direct connection* - Uses a database connection (JDBC) to retrieve the metadata. With" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:44 +msgid "Database direct connection requires to copy JDBC drivers in INSTALL_DIR_GEONETWORK/WEB-INF/lib." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:46 +msgid "Postgres JDBC drivers are distributed with GeoNetwork, but not for Oracle or SqlServer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:48 +msgid "*Database type* - ArcSde database type: Oracle, Postgres, SqlServer. Only available if connection type is configured to *Database direct connection*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:49 +msgid "*Username* - Username to connect to ArcSDE server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:50 +msgid "*Password* - Password of the ArcSDE user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:52 +msgid "**Advanced options for protocol arcsde**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:54 +msgid "*Validate records before import* - Defines the criteria to reject metadata that is invalid according to XSD and schematron rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:56 +msgid "Accept all metadata without validation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:57 +msgid "Accept metadata that are XSD valid." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:58 +msgid "Accept metadata that are XSD and schematron valid." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-sde.rst:61 +msgid "**Privileges** - Assign privileges to harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9cac903 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.pot @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:4 +msgid "THREDDS Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:6 +msgid "THREDDS catalogs describe inventories of datasets. They are organised in a hierarchical manner, listing descriptive information and access methods for each dataset. They typically catalog netCDF datasets but are not restricted to these types of files. This harvesting type crawls through a THREDDS catalog harvesting metadata for datasets and services described in it or in referenced netCDF datasets. This harvesting type can extract fragments of metadata from the THREDDS catalog, allowing the user to link or copy these fragments into a template to create metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a THREDDS Catalog Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:11 +msgid "The available options are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:13 +msgid "**Site**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the THREDDS catalog. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name of this THREDDS harvester instance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:16 +msgid "*Catalog URL* - The remote URL of the THREDDS Catalog from which metadata will be harvested. This must be the xml version of the catalog (i.e. ending with .xml). The harvester will crawl through all datasets and services defined in this catalog creating metadata for them as specified by the options described further below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:17 +msgid "*Metadata language* - Use this option to specify the language of the metadata to be harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:18 +msgid "*ISO topic category* - Use this option to specify the ISO topic category of service metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:19 +msgid "*Create ISO19119 metadata for all services in catalog* - Select this option to generate iso19119 metadata for services defined in the THREDDS catalog (eg. OpenDAP, OGC WCS, ftp) and for the THREDDS catalog itself." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:20 +msgid "*Create metadata for Collection datasets* - Select this option to generate metadata for each collection dataset (THREDDS dataset containing other datasets). Creation of metadata can be customised using options that are displayed when this option is selected as described further below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:21 +msgid "*Create metadata for Atomic datasets* - Select this option to generate metadata for each atomic dataset (THREDDS dataset not containing other datasets – for example cataloguing a netCDF dataset). Creation of metadata can be customised using options that are displayed when this option is selected as described further below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:23 +msgid "*Ignore harvesting attribute* - Select this option to harvest metadata for selected datasets regardless of the harvest attribute for the dataset in the THREDDS catalog. If this option is not selected, metadata will only be created for datasets that have a harvest attribute set to true." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:24 +msgid "*Extract DIF metadata elements and create ISO metadata* - Select this option to generate ISO metadata for datasets in the THREDDS catalog that have DIF metadata elements. When this option is selected a list of schemas is shown that have a DIFToISO.xsl stylesheet available (see for example ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/DIFToISO.xsl``). Metadata is generated by reading the DIF metadata items in the THREDDS into a DIF format metadata record and then converting that DIF record to ISO using the DIFToISO stylesheet." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:25 +msgid "*Extract Unidata dataset discovery metadata using fragments* - Select this option when the metadata in your THREDDS or netCDF/ncml datasets follows Unidata dataset discovery conventions (see http://www.unidata.ucar.edu/software/netcdf-java/formats/DataDiscoveryAttConvention.html). You will need to write your own stylesheets to extract this metadata as fragments and define a template to combine with the fragments. When this option is selected the following additional options will be shown:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:27 +msgid "*Select schema for output metadata records* - choose the ISO metadata schema or profile for the harvested metadata records. Note: only the schemas that have THREDDS fragment stylesheets will be displayed in the list (see the next option for the location of these stylesheets)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:28 +msgid "*Stylesheet to create metadata fragments* - Select a stylesheet to use to convert metadata for the dataset (THREDDS metadata and netCDF ncml where applicable) into metadata fragments. These stylesheets can be found in the directory convert/ThreddsToFragments in the schema directory eg. for iso19139 this would be ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/ThreddsToFragments``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:29 +msgid "*Create subtemplates for fragments and XLink them into template* - Select this option to create a subtemplate (=metadata fragment stored in GeoNetwork catalog) for each metadata fragment generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:30 +msgid "*Template to combine with fragments* - Select a template that will be filled in with the metadata fragments generated for each dataset. The generated metadata fragments are used to replace referenced elements in the templates with an xlink to a subtemplate if the *Create subtemplates* option is checked. If *Create subtemplates* is not checked, then the fragments are simply copied into the template metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:31 +msgid "For Atomic Datasets , one additional option is provided *Harvest new or modified datasets only*. If this option is checked only datasets that have been modified or didn't exist when the harvester was last run will be harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:33 +msgid "*Create Thumbnails* - Select this option to create thumbnails for WMS layers in referenced WMS services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:34 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:36 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling Options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:40 +msgid "**Privileges**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:44 +msgid "**Category for Service** - Select the category to assign to the ISO19119 service records for the THREDDS services." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:45 +msgid "**Category for Datasets** - Select the category to assign the generated metadata records (and any subtemplates) to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:47 +msgid "At the bottom of the page there are the following buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:49 +msgid "**Back** - Go back to the main harvesting page. The harvesting definition is not added." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:50 +msgid "**Save** - Saves this harvester definition creating a new harvesting instance. After the save operation has completed, the main harvesting page will be displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:53 +msgid "More about harvesting THREDDS DIF metadata elements with the THREDDS Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:55 +msgid "THREDDS catalogs can include elements from the DIF metadata standard. The Unidata netcdf-java library provides a DIFWriter process that can create a DIF metadata record from these elements. GeoNetwork has a DIFToISO stylesheet to transform these DIF records to ISO." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:58 +msgid "More about harvesting Unidata dataset discovery metadata with the THREDDS Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:60 +msgid "The options described above for the *Extract Unidata dataset discovery metadata using fragments* (see http://www.unidata.ucar.edu/software/netcdf-java/formats/DataDiscoveryAttConvention.html for more details of these conventions) invoke the following process for each collection dataset or atomic dataset in the THREDDS catalog:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:62 +msgid "The harvester bundles up the catalog URI, a generated uuid, the THREDDS metadata for the dataset (generated using the catalog subset web service) and the ncml for netCDF datasets into a single xml document. An example is shown below." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:63 +msgid "This document is then transformed using the specified stylesheet (see *Stylesheet* option above) to obtain a metadata fragments document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:64 +msgid "The metadata fragment harvester is then called to create subtemplates and/or metadata for the each dataset as requested" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:67 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:69 +msgid "DIF Metadata elements on datasets in THREDDS catalogs are not as widely used as metadata elements that follow the Unidata dataset discovery metadata conventions. This example will show how to harvest metadata elements that follow the Unidata data discovery conventions (see http://www.unidata.ucar.edu/software/netcdf-java/formats/DataDiscoveryAttConvention.html)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:71 +msgid "Two reference stylesheets are provided as examples of how to harvest metadata fragments from a THREDDS catalog. One of these stylesheets, thredds-metadata.xsl, is for generating iso19139 metadata fragments from THREDDS metadata following Unidata dataset discovery conventions. The other stylesheet, netcdf-attributes.xsl, is for generating iso19139 fragments from netCDF datasets following Unidata dataset discovery conventions. These stylesheets are designed for use with the 'HARVESTING TEMPLATE – THREDDS – DATA DISCOVERY' template and can be found in the schema 'convert' directory eg. for ISO19139 this is ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/ThreddsToFragments``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:73 +msgid "A sample template 'HARVESTING TEMPLATE – THREDDS – DATA DISCOVERY' has been provided for use with the stylesheets described above for the iso19139 metadata schema. This template is in the schema 'templates' directory eg. for ISO19139, this is ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/templates/thredds-harvester-unidata-data-discovery.xml``. *Before* attempting to run this example, you should make sure that this template and others from the iso19139 schema have been loaded into GeoNetwork using the 'Add templates' function in the Administration menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:75 +msgid "We'll now give an example of how to set up a harvester and harvest THREDDS metadata from one of the public unidata motherlode catalogs at http://motherlode.ucar.edu:8080/thredds/catalog/satellite/3.9/WEST-CONUS_4km/catalog.xml. If you were to paste this URL into your browser, you would see the XML representation of this THREDDS catalog. This is the document that is read and converted into metadata by the THREDDS harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:77 +msgid "In GeoNetwork, go into the Administration menu, choose Harvesting Management as described earlier. Add a THREDDS Catalog harvester. Fill out the harvesting management form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:79 +msgid "The first thing to notice is that the *Service URL* should be http://motherlode.ucar.edu:8080/thredds/catalog/satellite/3.9/WEST-CONUS_4km/catalog.xml. Make sure that you use the xml version of the catalog. If you use an html version, you will not be able to harvest any metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:81 +msgid "Now because this unidata motherload THREDDS catalog has lots of file level datasets (many thousands in fact), we will only harvest collection metadata. To do this you should check *Create metadata for Collection Datasets* and ignore the atomic datasets." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:83 +msgid "Next, because the metadata in this catalog follows Unidata data discovery conventions, so we will choose *Extract Unidata dataset discovery metadata using fragments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:85 +msgid "Next, we will check *Ignore harvesting attribute*. We do this because datasets in the THREDDS catalog can have an attribute indicating whether the dataset should be harvested or not. Since none of the datasets in this catalog have the harvesting attribute, we will ignore it. If we didn't check this box, all the datasets would be skipped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:87 +msgid "Next we will select the metadata schema that the harvested metadata will be written out in. We will choose *iso19139* here because this is the schema for which we have stylesheets that will convert THREDDS metadata to fragments of iso19139 metadata and a template into which these fragments of metadata can be copied or linked. After choosing *iso19139*, choices will appear that show these stylesheets and templates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:89 +msgid "The first choice is the stylesheet that will create iso19139 metadata fragments. Because we are interested in the thredds metadata elements in the THREDDS catalog, we will choose the *(iso19139) thredds-metadata* (located in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/ThreddsToFragments``) to convert these elements to iso19139 metadata fragments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:91 +msgid "For the purposes of this demonstration, we will *not* check *Create subtemplates for fragments (xlinks...)*. This means that the fragments of metadata created by the stylesheet will be copied directly into the metadata template. They will not be able to be reused (eg. shared between different metadata records). See the earlier section on metadata fragments if you are not sure what this means." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:93 +msgid "Finally, we will choose *HARVESTING TEMPLATE - THREDDS - UNIDATA DISCOVERY* as the template metadata record that will be combined with the metadata fragments to create the output records. This template will have been loaded into GeoNetwork from ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/templates/thredds-harvester-unidata-data-discovery.xml`` through the Add Templates function in the Administration interface. This template could be filled out with metadata common to all records before the harvester is run. The process by which the template is used to create metadata records is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:95 +msgid "For each dataset in the THREDDS catalog, the template will be copied to create a new iso19139 metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:96 +msgid "Each fragment of metadata harvested from a THREDDS dataset will be copied into the new iso19139 metadata record by matching an identifier in the template with an identifier in the fragment (this match is created by the developer of the template and the stylesheet)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:97 +msgid "The new record is then inserted into the GeoNetwork metadata catalog and the record content is indexed in Lucene for searching." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:99 +msgid "You can then fill out the remainder of the form according to how often you want the harvested metadata to be updated, what categories will be assigned to the created metadata record, which icon will be displayed with the metadata records in the search results and what the privileges on the created metadata records will be." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:101 +msgid "Save the harvester screen. Then from the harvesting management screen, check the box beside the newly created harvester, *Activate* it and then *Run* it. After a few moments (depending on your internet connection and machine) you should click on *Refresh*. If your harvest has been successful you should see a results panel appear something like the one shown in the following screenshot." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:103 +msgid "Notice that there were 48 metadata records created for the 48 collection level datasets in this THREDDS catalog. Each metadata record was formed by duplicating the metadata template and then copying 13 fragments of metadata into it - hence the total of 624 fragments harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-thredds.rst:105 +msgid "An example of one of the collection level metadata records created by the harvester in this example and rendered by GeoNetwork is shown below." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24befaed --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.pot @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:4 +msgid "WEBDAV Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:6 +msgid "This harvesting type uses the WebDAV (Distributed Authoring and Versioning) protocol or the WAF (web accessible folder) protocol to harvest metadata from a web server. It can be useful to users that want to publish their metadata through a web server that offers a DAV interface. The protocol permits retrieval of the contents of a web page (a list of files) along with the change date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a WebDAV harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:11 +msgid "**Site** - Options about the remote site." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:13 +msgid "*Subtype* - Select WebDAV or WAF according to the type of server being harvested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:14 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the remote site. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this instance of the WebDAV harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:15 +msgid "*URL* - The remote URL from which metadata will be harvested. Each file found that ends with .xml is assumed to be a metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:16 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:17 +msgid "*Use account* - Account credentials for basic HTTP authentication on the WebDAV/WAF server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:19 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:23 +msgid "**Options** - Specific harvesting options for this harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:25 +msgid "*Validate* - If checked, the metadata will be validated after retrieval. If the validation does not pass, the metadata will be skipped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:26 +msgid "*Recurse* - When the harvesting engine will find folders, it will recursively descend into them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:28 +msgid "**Privileges** - Assign privileges to harvested metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:32 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:37 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-webdav.rst:39 +msgid "The same metadata could be harvested several times by different instances of the WebDAV harvester. This is not good practise because copies of the same metadata record will have a different UUID." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff45989b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.pot @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:4 +msgid "WFS GetFeature Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:6 +msgid "Metadata can be present in the tables of a relational databases, which are commonly used by many organisations. Putting an OGC Web Feature Service (WFS) over a relational database will allow metadata to be extracted via standard query mechanisms. This harvesting type allows the user to specify a GetFeature query and map information from the features to fragments of metadata that can be linked or copied into a template to create metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:9 +msgid "Adding an OGC WFS GetFeature Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:11 +msgid "An OGC web feature service (WFS) implements a GetFeature query operation that returns data in the form of features (usually rows from related tables in a relational database). GeoNetwork, acting as a client, can read the GetFeature response and apply a user-supplied XSLT stylesheet to produce metadata fragments that can be linked or copied into a user-supplied template to build metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:13 +msgid "The available options are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:15 +msgid "**Site**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:17 +msgid "*Name* - This is a short description of the harvester. It will be shown in the harvesting main page as the name for this WFS GetFeature harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:18 +msgid "*Service URL* - The bare URL of the WFS service (no OGC params required)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:19 +msgid "*Metadata language* - The language that will be used in the metadata records created by the harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:20 +msgid "*OGC WFS GetFeature Query* - The OGC WFS GetFeature query used to extract features from the WFS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:21 +msgid "*Schema for output metadata records* - choose the metadata schema or profile for the harvested metadata records. Note: only the schemas that have WFS fragment stylesheets will be displayed in the list (see the next option for the location of these stylesheets)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:23 +msgid "*Stylesheet to create fragments* - User-supplied stylesheet that transforms the GetFeature response to a metadata fragments document (see below for the format of that document). Stylesheets exist in the WFSToFragments directory which is in the convert directory of the selected output schema. eg. for the iso19139 schema, this directory is ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/WFSToFragments``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:24 +msgid "*Save large response to disk* - Check this box if you expect the WFS GetFeature response to be large (eg. greater than 10MB). If checked, the GetFeature response will be saved to disk in a temporary file. Each feature will then be extracted from the temporary file and used to create the fragments and metadata records. If not checked, the response will be held in RAM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:25 +msgid "*Create subtemplates* - Check this box if you want the harvested metadata fragments to be saved as subtemplates in the metadata catalog and xlink'd into the metadata template (see next option). If not checked, the fragments will be copied into the metadata template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:26 +msgid "*Template to use to build metadata using fragments* - Choose the metadata template that will be combined with the harvested metadata fragments to create metadata records. This is a standard GeoNetwork metadata template record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:28 +msgid "*Category for records built with linked fragments* - Choose the metadata template that will be combined with the harvested metadata fragments to create metadata records. This is a standard GeoNetwork metadata template record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:30 +msgid "**Options**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:34 +msgid "**Privileges**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:38 +msgid "**Category for subtemplates** - When fragments are saved to GeoNetwork as subtemplates they will be assigned to the category selected here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:41 +msgid "More about turning the GetFeature Response into metadata fragments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:43 +msgid "Within the root element there can be zero to many elements. When generating metadata, each record element will result in the generation of one metadata document, otherwise, the element is used to group metadata fragments as required only (e.g. fragments generated for a dataset or feature)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:45 +msgid "Within a element there can be zero to many elements and zero to many elements. A element can itself contain zero to many elements. Ordering of elements and elements within a or element is not important." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:47 +msgid " elements contain individual xml fragments. The content of the can be any xml element from a supported GeoNetwork schema with the proviso that the element must contain enough relevant metadata to allow the target schema to be identified (i.e. distinguishing namespaces)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:49 +msgid " elements have significance during metadata generation only. They are used to group zero or more fragments for insertion into or creation of links in a copy of the metadata template used to generate the metadata. Where the element contains no elements, the referenced element in the template copy will be removed, otherwise it will be replaced with the contents of the fragment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:51 +msgid "Valid attributes on these elements and their function is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:55 +msgid "Element" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:55 +msgid "Attribute" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:55 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:57 +msgid "Record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:57 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:63 +msgid "Uuid" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:57 +msgid "Uuid of the generated metadata record (optional - one will be assigned by the harvester otherwise)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:60 +msgid "Fragment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:60 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:66 +msgid "Id" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:60 +msgid "Id of element in metadata template to replace/link from. Ignored when fragment is within a replacementGroup." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:63 +msgid "Uuid to use for generated subtemplate (used to link to this subtemplate from metadata)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:65 +msgid "Title" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:65 +msgid "Title of fragment – used as title of xlink" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:66 +msgid "ReplacementGroup" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:66 +msgid "Id of element in metadata template to delete, replace or link from to contained fragments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:70 +msgid "Finally, two examples of how to harvest metadata from the Features of an OGC WFS harvester can be given using stylesheets and templates supplied with GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:73 +msgid "Bundled GeoServer Boundaries Harvest example" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:75 +msgid "This example assumes that you have installed the bundled GeoServer that comes with GeoNetwork. The end result of this example will be 251 ISO19139 metadata records that link in 1506 fragments (6 per record) created from a GetFeature response on the boundaries shapefile in the GeoServer instance supplied with GeoNetwork. The records created contain metadata about the countries of the world." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:77 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:111 +msgid "The procedure to follow is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:79 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:113 +msgid "From the Administration->System Configuration menu, enable the XLink Resolver and *Save* the configuration to the database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:80 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:114 +msgid "Add an *OGC WFS GetFeature response* harvester from the Administration->Harvesting menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:81 +msgid "Give it a *Name* (eg. gboundaries) and enter the URL of the wfs service from the bundled geoserver (eg. http://localhost:8080/geoserver/wfs) in the *Service URL* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:82 +msgid "We'll use a simple GetFeature query to select all countries from the boundaries shapefile behind the WFS. The XML for such a query (which is to be entered in the *GetFeature Query* textarea) is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:93 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:128 +msgid "Choose an output schema - we'll choose *iso19139* as this schema has the example stylesheets and templates we need for this example. Notice that after this option is chosen the following options become visible and we'll take the following actions:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:95 +msgid "Choose the supplied 'geoserver_boundary_fragments' stylesheet to extract fragments from the GetFeature response in the *Stylesheet to use to create fragments* pull-down list. This stylesheet can be found in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/WFSToFragments``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:96 +msgid "Select the supplied 'Geoserver WFS Fragments Country Boundaries Test Template' template from the *Template to use to build metadata using fragments* pull-down list. This template can be found in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/templates/geoserver_fragment_tester.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:98 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:133 +msgid "Choose a category for the records created by the harvester, check the *One run only* box, add some privileges (simplest is to let All users have View rights). At this stage your harvester entry form should look like the following screenshot." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:100 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:135 +msgid "*Save* the harvester entry form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:101 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:136 +msgid "You will be returned to the harvester operations menu where you can *Activate* the harvester and then *Run* it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:103 +msgid "The results page shows that there were 1506 fragments of metadata harvested from the WFS GetFeature response. They were saved to the GeoNetwork database as subtemplates and linked into the metadata template to form 251 new metadata records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:107 +msgid "Deegree Version 2.x Philosopher Database example" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:109 +msgid "This example assumes that you have downloaded Deegree version 2.x and loaded the Philosopher example database. The end result of this example will be 7 ISO19139 metadata records that link in 42 fragments (6 per record) created from the GetFeature response from your deegree installation. The records contain metadata about 7 famous philosophers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:115 +msgid "Give it a *Name* (eg. deegree22-philosopher-test) and enter the URL of your deegree 2.2 installation in the *Service URL* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:116 +msgid "We'll use a simple GetFeature query to select all philosophers from the database under the WFS. The XML for such a query (which is to be entered in the *GetFeature Query* textarea) is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:130 +msgid "Choose the supplied 'deegree2_philosopher_fragments' stylesheet to extract fragments from the GetFeature response in the *Stylesheet to use to create fragments* pull-down list. This stylesheet can be found in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/convert/WFSToFragments``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:131 +msgid "Select the supplied 'Deegree 22 WFS Fragments Philosopher Database Test Template' template from the *Template to use to build metadata using fragments* pull-down list. This template can be found in ``GEONETWORK_DATA_DIR/config/schema_plugins/iso19139/templates/deegree_fragment_tester.xml``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:138 +msgid "After the harvester has been run you should see a results screen that looks something like the following screenshot." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-wfs-features.rst:140 +msgid "The results page shows that there were 42 fragments of metadata harvested from the WFS GetFeature response. They were saved to the GeoNetwork database as subtemplates and linked into the metadata template to form 7 new metadata records." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b2aed39 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.pot @@ -0,0 +1,436 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:4 +msgid "Z3950 Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:6 +msgid "Z3950 is a remote search and harvesting protocol that is commonly used to permit search and harvest of metadata. Although the protocol is often used for library catalogs, significant geospatial metadata catalogs can also be searched using Z3950 (eg. the metadata collections of the Australian Government agencies that participate in the Australian Spatial Data Directory - ASDD). This harvester allows the user to specify a Z3950 query and retrieve metadata records from one or more Z3950 servers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:9 +msgid "Adding a Z3950 Harvester" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:11 +msgid "The available options are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:13 +msgid "**Site**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:15 +msgid "*Name* - A short description of this Z3950 harvester. It will be shown in the harvesting main page using this name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:16 +msgid "*Z3950 Server(s)* - These are the Z3950 servers that will be searched. You can select one or more of these servers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:17 +msgid "*Z3950 Query* - Specify the Z3950 query to use when searching the selected Z3950 servers. At present this field is known to support the Prefix Query Format (also known as Prefix Query Notation) which is described at this URL: http://www.indexdata.com/yaz/doc/tools.html#PQF. See below for more information and some simple examples." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:18 +msgid "*Icon* - An icon to assign to harvested metadata. The icon will be used when showing search results." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:20 +msgid "**Options** - Scheduling options." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:24 +msgid "**Harvested Content**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:26 +msgid "*Apply this XSLT to harvested records* - Choose an XSLT here that will convert harvested records to a different format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:27 +msgid "*Validate* - If checked, records that do not/cannot be validated will be rejected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:29 +msgid "**Privileges**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:33 +msgid "**Categories**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:37 +msgid "this harvester automatically creates a new Category named after each of the Z3950 servers that return records. Records that are returned by a server are assigned to the category named after that server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:40 +msgid "More about PQF Z3950 Queries" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:42 +msgid "PQF is a rather arcane query language. It is based around the idea of attributes and attribute sets. The most common attribute set used for geospatial metadata in Z3950 servers is the GEO attribute set (which is an extension of the BIB-1 and GILS attribute sets - see http://www.fgdc.gov/standards/projects/GeoProfile). So all PQF queries to geospatial metadata Z3950 servers should start off with @attrset geo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:44 +msgid "The most useful attribute types in the GEO attribute set are as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:47 +msgid "@attr number" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:47 +msgid "Meaning" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:47 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:79 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:49 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:81 +msgid "1" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:49 +msgid "Use" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:49 +msgid "What field to search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:50 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:82 +msgid "2" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:50 +msgid "Relation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:50 +msgid "How to compare the term specified" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:51 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:61 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:84 +msgid "4" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:51 +msgid "Structure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:51 +msgid "What type is the term? eg. date, numeric, phrase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:52 +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:85 +msgid "5" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:52 +msgid "Truncation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:52 +msgid "How to truncate eg. right" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:55 +msgid "In GeoNetwork the numeric values that can be specified for ``@attr 1`` map to the lucene index field names as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:58 +msgid "@attr 1=" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:58 +msgid "Lucene index field" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:58 +msgid "ISO19139 element" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:60 +msgid "1016" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:60 +msgid "any" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:60 +msgid "All text from all metadata elements" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:61 +msgid "title, altTitle" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:61 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:citation//gmd:title/gco:CharacterString" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:62 +msgid "62" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:62 +msgid "abstract" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:62 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:abstract/gco:CharacterString" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:63 +msgid "1012" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:63 +msgid "_changeDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:63 +msgid "Not a metadata element (maintained by GeoNetwork)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:64 +msgid "30" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:64 +msgid "createDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:64 +msgid "gmd:MD_Metadata/gmd:dateStamp/gco:Date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:65 +msgid "31" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:65 +msgid "publicationDate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:65 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:citation//gmd:date/gmd:CI_DateCode/@codeListValue='publication'" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:66 +msgid "2072" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:66 +msgid "tempExtentBegin" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:66 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:extent//gmd:temporalElement//gml:begin(Position)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:67 +msgid "2073" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:67 +msgid "tempExtentEnd" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:67 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:extent//gmd:temporalElement//gml:end(Position)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:68 +msgid "2012" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:68 +msgid "fileId" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:68 +msgid "gmd:MD_Metadata/gmd:fileIdentifier/*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:69 +msgid "12" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:69 +msgid "identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:69 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:citation//gmd:identifier//gmd:code/*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:70 +msgid "21,29,2002,3121,3122" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:70 +msgid "keyword" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:70 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:keyword/*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:71 +msgid "2060" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:71 +msgid "northBL,eastBL,southBL,westBL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:71 +msgid "gmd:identificationInfo//gmd:extent//gmd:EX_GeographicBoundingBox/gmd:westBoundLongitude*/gco:Decimal (etc)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:74 +msgid "Note that this is not a complete set of the mappings between Z3950 GEO attribute set and the GeoNetwork lucene index field names for ISO19139. Check out INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xml/search/z3950Server.xsl and INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/xml/schemas/iso19139/index-fields.xsl for more details and annexe A of the GEO attribute set for Z3950 at http://www.fgdc.gov/standards/projects/GeoProfile/annex_a.html for more details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:76 +msgid "Common values for the relation attribute (``@attr=2``):" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:79 +msgid "@attr 2=" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:81 +msgid "Less than" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:82 +msgid "Less than or equal to" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:83 +msgid "3" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:83 +msgid "Equals" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:84 +msgid "Greater than or equal to" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:85 +msgid "Greater than" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:86 +msgid "6" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:86 +msgid "Not equal to" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:87 +msgid "7" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:87 +msgid "Overlaps" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:88 +msgid "8" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:88 +msgid "Fully enclosed within" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:89 +msgid "9" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:89 +msgid "Encloses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:90 +msgid "10" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:90 +msgid "Fully outside of" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:94 +msgid "So a simple query to get all metadata records that have the word 'the' in any field would be:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:96 +msgid "``@attrset geo @attr 1=1016 the``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:98 +msgid "``@attr 1=1016`` means that we are doing a search on any field in the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:100 +msgid "A more sophisticated search on a bounding box might be formulated as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:102 +msgid "``@attrset geo @attr 1=2060 @attr 4=201 @attr 2=7 \"-36.8262 142.6465 -44.3848 151.2598``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:104 +msgid "``@attr 1=2060`` means that we are doing a bounding box search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:105 +msgid "``@attr 4=201`` means that the query contains coordinate strings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:106 +msgid "``@attr 2=7`` means that we are searching for records whose bounding box overlaps the query box specified at the end of the query" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:109 +msgid "Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:111 +msgid "Z3950 servers must be configured for GeoNetwork in ``INSTALL_DIR/web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/classes/JZKitConfig.xml.tem``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/harvesting-z3950.rst:112 +msgid "every time the harvester runs, it will remove previously harvested records and create new ones." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a12aef4 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/harvesting/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,446 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:4 +msgid "Harvesting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:6 +msgid "Data discovery gets more interesting once multiple catalogs and services share there resources." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:9 +msgid "Harvesting is the process of ingesting metadata from remote sources and storing it locally in the catalog for fast searching. It is a scheduled process, so local copy and remote metadata are kept aligned." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:14 +msgid "The following sources can be harvested:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:33 +msgid "Mechanism overview" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:35 +msgid "The harvesting mechanism relies on the concept of a ``universally unique identifier (UUID)``. This is a special id because it is not only unique locally to the node that generated it but it is globally unique. It is a combination of :" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:39 +msgid "the network interface MAC address," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:40 +msgid "the current date/time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:41 +msgid "and a random number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:44 +msgid "For every new record, a UUID is generated and assigned to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:46 +msgid "Another important concept behind the harvesting is the ``last change date``. Every time you change a metadata record, the last change date is updated. Just storing this parameter and comparing it with a new one allows any system to find out if the metadata record has been modified since last update." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:51 +msgid "These two concepts allow catalogs to fetch remote metadata, check if it has been updated and remove it locally if it has been removed remotely. UUIDs also allowed cross catalog harvesting in case B harvests from C and A harvests from B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:57 +msgid "Harvesting life cycle" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:59 +msgid "When a harvester is created, there is no harvested metadata. During the first run, all remote matching metadata are retrieved and stored locally. For some harvesters, after the first run, only metadata that has changed will be retrieved." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:65 +msgid "Harvested metadata are (by default) not editable for the following reasons:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:67 +msgid "The harvesting is periodic so any local change to harvested metadata will be lost during the next run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:69 +msgid "The change date may be used to keep track of changes so if the metadata gets changed, the harvesting mechanism may be compromised." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:72 +msgid "Metadata properties (like categories, privileges etc...) on harvested metadata records can be updated but will be updated on next run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:75 +msgid "if you really want to edit harvested metadata records and aren't worried by the possible issues described above, there is now a configuration setting which will permit this. See :ref:`editing_harvested_records` for more details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:80 +msgid "Another option would be to assign the harvested records to the local catalog and then modify them. For the time being, no interface allows to change record's source catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:86 +msgid "The harvesting process goes on until one of the following situations arises:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:88 +msgid "An administrator stops (deactivates) the harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:89 +msgid "An exception arises. In this case the harvester is automatically stopped." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:91 +msgid "When a harvester is removed, all metadata records associated with that harvester are removed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:95 +msgid "Multiple harvesting and hierarchies" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:97 +msgid "Catalogues that use UUIDs to identify metadata records (eg. GeoNetwork) can be harvested several times without having to take care about metadata overlap." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:99 +msgid "As an example, consider the GeoNetwork harvesting type which allows one GeoNetwork node to harvest metadata records from another GeoNetwork node and the following scenario:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:101 +msgid "Node (A) has created metadata (a)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:102 +msgid "Node (B) harvests (a) from (A)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:103 +msgid "Node (C) harvests (a) from (B)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:104 +msgid "Node (D) harvests from both (A), (B) and (C)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:106 +msgid "In this scenario, Node (D) will get the same metadata (a) from all 3 nodes (A), (B), (C). The metadata will flow to (D) following 3 different paths but thanks to its UUID only one copy will be stored. When (a) is changed in (A), a new version will flow to (D) but, thanks to the change date, the copy in (D) will be updated with the most recent version." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:113 +msgid "Harvesting Fragments of Metadata to support re-use" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:115 +msgid "All the harvesters except for the THREDDS and OGC WFS GetFeature harvester create a complete metadata record that is inserted into or replaces an existing record in the catalog. However, it's often the case that:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:117 +msgid "the metadata harvested from an external source is really only one or more fragments of the metadata required to describe a resource such as a dataset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:118 +msgid "you might want to combine harvested fragments of metadata with manually entered or static metadata in a single record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:119 +msgid "a fragment of metadata harvested from an external source may be required in more than one metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:121 +msgid "For example, you may only be interested in harvesting the geographic extent and/or contact information from an external source and manually entering or maintaining the remainder of the content in the metadata record. You may also be interested in re-using the contact information for a person or organisation in more than one metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:123 +msgid "To support this capability, both the WFS GetFeature Harvester and the THREDDS harvester, allow fragments of metadata to be harvested and linked or copied into a template record to create metadata records. Fragments that are saved into the GeoNetwork database are called subtemplates and can be used in more than one metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:125 +msgid "As shown above, an example of a metadata fragment is the gmd:contactInfo element of an iso19139 document. This element contains contact details for an individual or an organisation. If a fragment is stored in the GeoNetwork database as a subtemplate for a given person or organisation, then this fragment can be referenced in metadata records where this organisation or individual is specified using an XML linking mechanism called XLink." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:129 +msgid "HTTPS support" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:131 +msgid "Harvesting between GeoNetwork nodes may require the HTTPS protocol. If harvesting from an https GeoNetwork URL, the server will need to have a trusted certificate available in a JVM keystore accessible to the GeoNetwork node running the harvest." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:133 +msgid "If you don't have a trusted certificate in the JVM keystore being used by GeoNetwork, the harvester may issue an exception like this when you try to harvest from the https GeoNetwork::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:147 +msgid "The server certificate for the GeoNetwork server being harvested needs to be added to the JVM keystore with `keytool `_ in order to be trusted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:149 +msgid "An alternative way to add the certificate is to use a script like::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:169 +msgid "To use the script, the Java compiler must be installed and the file `InstallCert.java `_, must be downloaded and placed in the same directory as the script." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:171 +msgid "The script will add the certificate to the JVM keystore, if you run it as follows:::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:175 +msgid "Use this script at your own risk! Before installing a certificate in the JVM keystore as trusted, make sure you understand the security implications." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:177 +msgid "After adding the certificate you will need to restart GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:182 +msgid "The main page" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:184 +msgid "To access the harvesting main page you have to be logged in as an administrator. From the administration page, select the harvest shorcut. The harvesting main page will then be displayed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:188 +msgid "The page shows a list of the currently defined harvesters and a set of buttons for management functions. The meaning of each column in the list of harvesters is as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:190 +msgid "*Select* Check box to select one or more harvesters. The selected harvesters will be affected by the first row of buttons (activate, deactivate, run, remove). For example, if you select three harvesters and press the Remove button, they will all be removed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:191 +msgid "*Name* This is the harvester name provided by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:192 +msgid "*Type* The harvester type (eg. GeoNetwork, WebDAV etc...)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:193 +msgid "*Status* An icon showing current status. See :ref:`admin_harvesting_status` for the different icons and status descriptions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:194 +msgid "*Errors* An icon showing the result of the last harvesting run, which could have succeeded or not. See :ref:`admin_harvesting_status` for the different icons and error descriptions. Hovering the cursor over the icon will show detailed information about the last harvesting run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:195 +msgid "*Run at* and *Every*: Scheduling of harvester runs. Essentially the time of the day + how many hours between repeats and on which days the harvester will run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:196 +msgid "*Last run* The date, in ISO 8601 format, of the most recent harvesting run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:197 +msgid "*Operation* A list of buttons/links to operations on a harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:199 +msgid "Selecting *Edit* will allow you to change the parameters for a harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:200 +msgid "Selecting *Clone* will allow you to create a clone of this harvester and start editing the details of the clone." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:201 +msgid "Selecting *History* will allow you to view/change the harvesting history for a harvester - see :ref:`harvest_history`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:203 +msgid "At the bottom of the list of harvesters are two rows of buttons. The first row contains buttons that can operate on a selected set of harvesters. You can select the harvesters you want to operate on using the check box in the Select column and then press one of these buttons. When the button finishes its action, the check boxes are cleared. Here is the meaning of each button:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:207 +msgid "*Activate* When a new harvester is created, the status is *inactive*. Use this button to make it *active* and start the harvester(s) according to the schedule it has/they have been configured to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:212 +msgid "*Deactivate* Stops the harvester(s). Note: this does not mean that currently running harvest(s) will be stopped. Instead, it means that the harvester(s) will not be scheduled to run again." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:216 +msgid "*Run* Start the selected harvesters immediately. This is useful for testing harvester setups." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:218 +msgid "*Remove* Remove all currently selected harvesters. A dialogue will ask the user to confirm the action." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:221 +msgid "The second row contains general purpose buttons. Here is the meaning of each button:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:223 +msgid "*Back* Simply returns to the main administration page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:225 +msgid "*Add* This button creates a new harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:227 +msgid "*Refresh* Refreshes the current list of harvesters from the server. This can be useful to see if the harvesting list has been altered by someone else or to get the status of any running harvesters." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:230 +msgid "*History* Show the harvesting history of all harvesters. See :ref:`harvest_history` for more details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:235 +msgid "Harvesting Status and Error Icons" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:240 +msgid "Harvesting result tips" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:242 +msgid "When a harvester runs and completes, a tool tip showing detailed information about the harvesting process is shown in the **Errors** column for the harvester. If the harvester succeeded then hovering the cursor over the tool tip will show a table, with some rows labelled as follows:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:245 +msgid "**Total** - This is the total number of metadata found remotely. Metadata with the same id are considered as one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:246 +msgid "**Added** - Number of metadata added to the system because they were not present locally." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:247 +msgid "**Removed** - Number of metadata that have been removed locally because they are not present in the remote server anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:248 +msgid "**Updated** - Number of metadata that are present locally but that needed to be updated because their last change date was different from the remote one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:249 +msgid "**Unchanged** - Local metadata left unchanged. Their remote last change date did not change." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:250 +msgid "**Unknown schema** - Number of skipped metadata because their format was not recognised by GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:251 +msgid "**Unretrievable** - Number of metadata that were ready to be retrieved from the remote server but for some reason there was an exception during the data transfer process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:252 +msgid "**Bad Format** - Number of skipped metadata because they did not have a valid XML representation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:253 +msgid "**Does not validate** - Number of metadata which did not validate against their schema. These metadata were harvested with success but skipped due to the validation process. Usually, there is an option to force validation: if you want to harvest these metadata anyway, simply turn/leave it off." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:254 +msgid "**Thumbnails/Thumbnails failed** - Number of metadata thumbnail images added/that could not be added due to some failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:255 +msgid "**Metadata URL attribute used** - Number of layers/featuretypes/coverages that had a metadata URL that could be used to link to a metadata record (OGC Service Harvester only)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:256 +msgid "**Services added** - Number of ISO19119 service records created and added to the catalogue (for THREDDS catalog harvesting only)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:257 +msgid "**Collections added** - Number of collection dataset records added to the catalogue (for THREDDS catalog harvesting only)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:258 +msgid "**Atomics added** - Number of atomic dataset records added to the catalogue (for THREDDS catalog harvesting only)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:259 +msgid "**Subtemplates added** - Number of subtemplates (= fragment visible in the catalog) added to the metadata catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:260 +msgid "**Subtemplates removed** - Number of subtemplates (= fragment visible in the catalog) removed from the metadata catalog." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:261 +msgid "**Fragments w/Unknown schema** - Number of fragments which have an unknown metadata schema." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:262 +msgid "**Fragments returned** - Number of fragments returned by the harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:263 +msgid "**Fragments matched** - Number of fragments that had identifiers that in the template used by the harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:264 +msgid "**Existing datasets** - Number of metadata records for datasets that existed when the THREDDS harvester was run." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:265 +msgid "**Records built** - Number of records built by the harvester from the template and fragments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:266 +msgid "**Could not insert** - Number of records that the harvester could not insert into the catalog (usually because the record was already present eg. in the Z3950 harvester this can occur if the same record is harvested from different servers)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:270 +msgid "Adding new harvesters" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:272 +msgid "The Add button in the main page allows you to add new harvesters. A drop down list is then shown with all the available harvester protocols." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:274 +msgid "You can choose the type of harvest you intend to perform and press *Add* to begin the process of adding the harvester. The supported harvesters and details of what to do next are in the following sections:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:279 +msgid "Harvest History" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:281 +msgid "Each time a harvester is run, it generates a status report of what was harvested and/or what went wrong (eg. exception report). These reports are stored in a table in the database used by GeoNetwork. The entire harvesting history for all harvesters can be recalled using the History button on the Harvesting Management page. The harvest history for an individual harvester can also be recalled using the History link in the Operations for that harvester." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:283 +msgid "Once the harvest history has been displayed it is possible to:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:285 +msgid "expand the detail of any exceptions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:286 +msgid "sort the history by harvest date (or in the case of the history of all harvesters, by harvester name)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/harvesting/index.rst:287 +msgid "delete any history entry or the entire history" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b184820 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/index.rst:4 +msgid "User guide" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..329072ac --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/index.rst:4 +msgid "Publishing" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca164c24 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.pot @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:4 +msgid "Managing privileges" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:7 +msgid "To manage privileges to your metadata record and any attached data you will need to identify User Groups and the privileges you want to assign to users in these groups. eg. View the metadata, download the data attached to the record, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:9 +msgid "For instance, you can specify that the metadata and related services are visible to all (Internet users) or just to internal users only (Intranet). Privileges are assigned on a per group basis. Depending on the user profile (Guest, Registered User, Editor, Admin etc.) access to these functions may differ on a per user basis." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:11 +msgid "To assign privileges, follow these steps:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:13 +msgid "Find your metadata record by using the search option. Whether you have multiple or single results from the search, on top of the individual record or next to the record you will always see a row of buttons including a Privileges button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:16 +msgid "Click on the Privileges button. A drop down menu will appear from which you can assign certain privileges to specific groups using checkboxes. Simply click on the small box next to the privilege to place or remove a checkmark. Set All and Clear All buttons allow you to place and remove the checkmarks all at once." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:18 +msgid "Below is a brief description for each privilege to help you identify which ones you should assign to which group(s)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:20 +msgid "**Publish**: Users in the specified group/s are able to view the metadata eg. if it matches search criteria entered by such a user." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:22 +msgid "**Download**: Users in the specified group/s are able to download the data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:24 +msgid "**Interactive Map**: Users in the specified group/s are able to get an interactive map. The interactive map has to be created separately using a Web Map Server such as GeoServer, which is distributed with GeoNetwork." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:26 +msgid "**Featured**: When randomly selected by GeoNetwork, the metadata record can appear in the `Featured` section of the GeoNetwork home page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:28 +msgid "**Notify**: Users in the specified group receive notification if data attached to the metadata record is downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:31 +msgid "Please review and make sure that you understand :ref:`user_profiles` in the User and Group Administration section of this manual." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:33 +msgid "A public metadata record is a metadata record that has the view privilege for the group named \"All\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:35 +msgid "The following rules apply to Viewing and Editing permissions on a metadata record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:38 +msgid "Viewing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:40 +msgid "An *administrator* can view any metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:42 +msgid "A *content reviewer* can view a metadata if:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:44 +msgid "The metadata is public or" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:46 +msgid "The metadata is part of a group that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:48 +msgid "A *user administrator* or an *editor* can view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:50 +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:56 +msgid "All metadata that has the view privilege selected for one of the groups she/he is member of." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:52 +msgid "All metadata created by her/him." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:54 +msgid "A *registered user* can view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:58 +msgid "Public metadata can be viewed by any user (logged in or not)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:61 +msgid "Editing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:63 +msgid "An *administrator* can edit any metadata." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:65 +msgid "A *reviewer* can edit a metadata if:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:67 +msgid "The metadata owner is member of one of the groups assigned to the reviewer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:69 +msgid "She/he is the metadata owner." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:71 +msgid "A *User Administrator* or an *Editor* can only edit metadata she/he created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:74 +msgid "Setting Privileges on a metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:76 +msgid "A button to access the Privileges page for a metadata record will appear in the search results or when the record is being viewed for:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:78 +msgid "All Administrators" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:80 +msgid "All Reviewers that are member of one of the groups assigned to the metadata owner." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:82 +msgid "The Owner of the metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:84 +msgid "Privileges for the All and Intranet groups can only be edited by Administrators and Reviewers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:87 +msgid "Setting Privileges on a selected set of metadata records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:89 +msgid "Privileges can be set on a selected set of records in the search results using the \"actions on selected set\" menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:94 +msgid "The following rules apply:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:96 +msgid "the groups are those that the user belongs to" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:97 +msgid "the privileges specified will only be applied to records that the user has ownership or administration rights on - any other records will be skipped" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/managing-privileges.rst:98 +msgid "the current records privileges will be reset and replaced by the one selected" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/restricting-information-to-metadata-sections.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/restricting-information-to-metadata-sections.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecee2382 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/restricting-information-to-metadata-sections.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/restricting-information-to-metadata-sections.rst:4 +msgid "Restricting information to metadata sections" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1010259f --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.pot @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:4 +msgid "Transfering privileges" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:7 +msgid "Transfer Ownership" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:9 +msgid "When metadata ownership needs to be transferred from one user to another for all or specific metadata records, the *Transfer Ownership* option is available." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:13 +msgid "*How to open the Transfer Ownership page*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:15 +msgid "It is located in the \"actions on selected set\" in the search result and once selected, opens the following panel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:19 +msgid "*The Transfer Ownership panel*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:21 +msgid "*Select New Owner*: Select a user in this auto-complete." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:23 +msgid "The drop down will be filled with all Editors visible to you. If you are not an Administrator, you will view only a subset of all Editors." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/publishing/transfering-privileges.rst:25 +msgid "*Select group*: Select one of the groups this user is a member of. Privileges to groups All and Intranet are not transferable." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/quick-start/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/quick-start/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cfe4971c --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/quick-start/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:4 +msgid "Quick start" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:7 +msgid "GeoNetwork is a catalog application to manage spatially referenced resources. It provides powerful metadata editing and search functions as well as an interactive web map viewer. It is currently used in numerous Spatial Data Infrastructure initiatives across the world." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:12 +msgid "Apart from how to start the catalog, this Quick Start describes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:14 +msgid "some of the different ways you can search for spatial data" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:15 +msgid "how to download and display data from the search results" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:19 +msgid "Starting the catalog" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:21 +msgid "After going through the installer steps, simply go to bin folder and click on start.bat (on windows) or startup.sh (on linux)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:24 +msgid "Open a web browser and go to the GeoNetwork homepage. If you installed it on your computer, this is probably at ``http://localhost:8080/geonetwork``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:26 +msgid "When you use Docker, you can find our what IP and Port to connect to from the Kitematic application. Or run ``docker ps`` in a terminal (on Linux or OSX). This should give you the port the Docker is running on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:30 +msgid "Your opening screen should look like this:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:37 +msgid "Signing in and load templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:39 +msgid "Click the ``sign in`` to connect as administrator. The default account is username ``admin`` with password ``admin``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:45 +msgid "Once connected, the top toolbar should provide a link to the ``admin console`` and your login details." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:50 +msgid "Go to the ``admin console`` and click on ``metadata and templates``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:54 +msgid "Choose all standards and click ``load samples`` and then ``load templates`` in order to load examples:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:59 +msgid "Go back to the search page to see examples:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:64 +msgid "Searching information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:66 +msgid "The search form provides different ways for search:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:68 +msgid "a full text search box providing suggestions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:73 +msgid "facets which defines groups that you can easily click on to browse the content of the catalog" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:78 +msgid "spatial filtering to choose information in specific areas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:83 +msgid "advanced search" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:90 +msgid "Discovering information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:92 +msgid "Search results present main information about each resources: title, abstract, categories, status, overview and links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:98 +msgid "Clicking the record will provide more in depth details about the resources:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:100 +msgid "Download and links" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:101 +msgid "About the resource" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:102 +msgid "Technical information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:103 +msgid "Metadata details" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:108 +msgid "To get more information, switch the advanced view mode. To update the record, click the edit button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:113 +msgid "From the results or the record view, you can easily add WMS layers referenced in a metadata record on the map. With the map, you can visualize your data, choose your background maps, query objects, display on a 3D globe and more ..." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:123 +msgid "For more information" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/quick-start/index.rst:125 +msgid "Continue reading the documentation." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ccbe40a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/index.rst:4 +msgid "Classify information" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab2719f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.pot @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.rst:4 +msgid "Tagging with categories" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.rst:6 +msgid "A catalog can define a set of categories that can be used to classify metadata records for easy searching or managment purposes (see :ref:`managing-categories`). Categories will not be added to the metadata records itself and as such may not be exported when the record is harvested (eg. when using CSW protocol). If the category needs to be propagated with the metadata, use other harvesting protocols (eg. GeoNetwork) or use keywords (see :ref:`tagging-with-keywords`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.rst:14 +msgid "2 ways available to assign categories to a metadata record:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.rst:16 +msgid "Search records, select one or more record and choose the ``Update categories`` on the selection. From here you can either replace categories or add new ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-categories.rst:24 +msgid "Search the metadata record, open the editor and click on the ``Categories`` button. A drop down menu will appear from which you can assign one or more categories using checkboxes" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-keywords.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-keywords.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9103f795 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-keywords.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/tag-information/tagging-with-keywords.rst:4 +msgid "Tagging with keywords" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e5d2716 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.pot @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:4 +msgid "Updating a set of records from the admin console" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:7 +msgid "In some circumstances, users may want to update a set of records. Administrator users can, from the ``admin console``, open the ``tools``, ``Batch process`` page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:12 +msgid "From this page, user can:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:14 +msgid "Select a set of records by running a search and selecting records to modify" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:18 +msgid "Choose a process from the list" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:25 +msgid "New process can be added. See :ref:`batch-process-add`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:28 +msgid "Define process parameters (if any)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:30 +msgid "Run the process and follow the progress." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:33 +msgid "Process can only be applied to records that current user can edit. If not, then the non editable record is ignored and the process continue. The report contains the following information:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:37 +msgid "Number of records to process" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:39 +msgid "Number of records affected by the process" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:41 +msgid "Number of records unchanged (for search and replace process)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:43 +msgid "Number of records for which the process was not found (process depends on the standard, and may not exists depending on the standard)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:46 +msgid "Number of records that current user can't edit" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:52 +msgid "Before running a process, it is recommended to make a backup of all metadata records to be updated in case something goes wrong with the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:56 +msgid "Document other processes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:60 +msgid "Search and replace" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:62 +msgid "This process search values in elements and replace by other values. It supports ISO19139 and Dublin Core records. The configuration is the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:69 +msgid "Select a package (ISO19139 or Dublin Core)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:71 +msgid "Choose an element from that package to replace (the one preconfigured is about contact but can be extended - see below)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:74 +msgid "Define the search value" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:76 +msgid "Define the replacement" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:78 +msgid "Click ``Add replacement``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:81 +msgid "Multiple replacements can be configured and added. Once the configuration done, user can save the configuration by clicking ``Download configuration``. The configuration is downloaded as JSON format and can be updated and reloaded later by copy/paste in the replacement configuration textarea and by clicking ``Load configuration``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:86 +msgid "Sample configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:98 +msgid "In the configuration, the ``element`` define the target element in the metadata record. It starts with the schema identifier and then define a path to the element. This is a regular expression and could use ``.*`` for matching all elements wherever in the document. To match a more specific element, user can defined complete path like ``iso19139\\\\.contact\\\\.individualName`` to match only the metadata contact individual name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:104 +msgid "The ``searchval`` is also a `regular expression `_. It could be simple text or more advanced expression. For example with catching groups, searching for ``(.*)`` and replacing by ``Mr $1`` will replace ``John`` by ``Mr John``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:108 +msgid "The last parameter is the vacuum mode defining what to do with empty elements:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-from-admin.rst:114 +msgid "After the configuration done, user can preview the changes by clicking the ``Test`` button and then apply the changes with ``Run``" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e90b02ce --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.pot @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:4 +msgid "Updating a set of records using XSLT" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:9 +msgid "Applying changes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:11 +msgid "Administrator user can use the catalog API to update a set of records with an XSLT transformation. The steps are the following:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:14 +msgid "Sign in as admin user" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:16 +msgid "Search records to be updated using the ``q`` service eg. select all templates in a specific standard: http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/q?_schema=iso19115-3&_isTemplate=y" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:19 +msgid "Select all records matching the search with http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/metadata.select?selected=add-all" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:21 +msgid "Trigger the process with http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/md.processing.batch?process=my-custom-process" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:23 +msgid "Check the progress report with http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/md.processing.batch.report" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:25 +msgid "At the end of the process, a summary describes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:27 +msgid "Number of records to process" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:29 +msgid "Number of records to processed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:31 +msgid "Number of records not found (in case one record gets deleted since the selection)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:33 +msgid "Number of records with errors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:35 +msgid "Number of records with process not defined in its standard" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:37 +msgid "Number of records that current user can't edit" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:40 +msgid "A process can also be applied to one metadata record using the ``md.processing`` service. eg. http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng/md.processing?uuid=46eac9e4-33cb-45b7-a104-7bcc8e654c98&process=keywords-mapper&search=water&replace=Water" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:43 +msgid "Parameters are:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:45 +msgid "uuid or id: the metadata UUID or the metadata internal identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:47 +msgid "process: The process identifier" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:49 +msgid "add other extra parameters depending on the process (see below)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:56 +msgid "Adding batch process" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:59 +msgid "Creating the processing file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:61 +msgid "Batch process are defined on a per schema basis. To check the list of available process for a standard check the ``/config/schemaPlugins//process`` folder." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:64 +msgid "The ``process`` folder contains a set of XSLT. The name of the XSLT file without extension is used to trigger the process. For example, if using ``md.processing.batch?process=my-custom-process``, the process XSLT MUST be named ``my-custom-process.xsl``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:70 +msgid "Processing the XML of the record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:72 +msgid "The XSLT process will be applied to each metadata record in the selection. Each document will have as root element the metadata XML document with the ``geonet:info`` element. The ``geonet:info`` element contains metadata about the metadata. This element MUST be removed by the process to not alter the record when saved in the database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:103 +msgid "Adding parameters" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:106 +msgid "The XSLT process can retrieve parameters which may be provided in the URL using ``xsl:param``. For example, if using ``md.processing.batch?process=my-custom-process&myParameter=test``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:118 +msgid "In this example, ``xsl:param`` will be accessible as a variable using ``$myParameter`` and it will have an empty value if not set by the URL parameter. To check that a parameter is properly set, use ``xsl:message`` to output information to the log file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:129 +msgid "The XSLT process also have access to catalog parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:131 +msgid "guiLang: Current UI language" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:133 +msgid "baseUrl: The service base URL (eg ``http://localhost:8080/geonetwork``)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:135 +msgid "catalogUrl: The catalog URL (eg ``http://localhost:8080/geonetwork/srv/eng``)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:137 +msgid "nodeId: The node identifier (default ``srv``)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:140 +msgid "To use one of those parameters in the process, use ``xsl:param``:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:148 +msgid "Making a copy is a minimum" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:151 +msgid "A process MUST at least do:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:153 +msgid "a copy of everything" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:155 +msgid "remove geonet:info metadata" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:177 +msgid "Then customize the process to update the metadata record." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:181 +msgid "Processing examples" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:183 +msgid "See :code:`schemas/iso19139/src/main/plugin/iso19139/process` for examples." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:185 +msgid "On top of the minimum that the process MUST do, the process can define additional actions using new templates:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:188 +msgid "Removing an element. Eg. removing all report about DQ_TopologicalConsistency:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:195 +msgid "Set priority to 2 in order for your template to take priority over the main template making the copy of everything." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:205 +msgid "Registering a process as a suggestion" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:207 +msgid "See :ref:`metadata_suggestion`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:214 +msgid "Registering a process as an editor action" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:216 +msgid "An XSLT process can be used in the editor to trigger specific actions. For example, the INSPIRE view display a button to add a resource identifier if none defined ending by the metadata identifier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:234 +msgid "See ref:`creating-custom-editor`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:242 +msgid "Adding XSLT conversion for import" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate-xsl.rst:244 +msgid "Add XSL transformations to ``web/geonetwork/xsl/conversion/import`` folder in order to provide new import options to the user. Files can be added to this folder without restarting the application." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae828d27 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate.pot @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate.rst:4 +msgid "Updating a set of records" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/batchupdate.rst:7 +msgid "In some circumstances, users may want to update a set of records. The catalog provides 2 options for that:" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6632b866 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.pot @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:4 +msgid "Publishing GIS data in a map server" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:6 +msgid "To publish data from the metadata editor in a remote map server, first the catalog administrator needs to configure connection to map servers in the administration interface (see :ref:`map-server-configuration`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:10 +msgid "Once done, editors have to reference GIS files or spatial database tables in the metadata record (see :ref:`linking-online-resources-georesource`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:13 +msgid "When a spatial resource is detected and one or more map servers are configured, the geopublication wizard is available in the metadata editor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:18 +msgid "Choose a resource from the list to display the wizard. The wizard display the list of map servers available:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:23 +msgid "Choose the server you want to publish the data in. When selected, the catalog will check if the dataset is already published or not. If found, it will be added to the map." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:29 +msgid "If not, the status message indicates that the dataset is not available." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:34 +msgid "From the menu, control the publication process:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:38 +msgid "Click the ``check`` button to verify that the dataset is already published in the selected map server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:40 +msgid "Click the ``publish`` button to register the data on the selected map server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:42 +msgid "Click the ``unpublish`` button to unregister the data on the selected map server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:44 +msgid "Click the ``link service to metadata`` button to add links to the OGC service in the current metadata record for the published layer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/geopublication.rst:49 +msgid "Once a WMS layer is registered in a metadata record, remember that you can easily generate an overview using the service (see :ref:`linking-thumbnail-from-wms`)." +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/index.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/index.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b968989 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/index.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/index.rst:4 +msgid "Workflow" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47415876 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.pot @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:4 +msgid "Life cycle" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:8 +msgid "Life cycle states" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:11 +msgid "Metadata records have a lifecycle that typically goes through one or more states. For example, when a record is:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:14 +msgid "created and edited by an ``Editor`` user it is in the ``Draft`` state." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:17 +msgid "reviewed by a ``Content Reviewer`` user it would typically be in a ``Submitted`` state." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:20 +msgid "completed and corrected by the ``Content Reviewer`` it would be in the ``Approved`` state and may be made available for casual search and harvest by assigning privileges to the catalog ``All`` group." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:24 +msgid "superseded or replaced and the state would be ``Retired``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:27 +msgid "The catalog has (an extensible) set of states that a metadata record can have:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:29 +msgid "``Unknown`` - this is the default state - nothing is known about the status of the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:31 +msgid "``Draft`` - the record is under construction or being edited." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:33 +msgid "``Submitted`` - the record has been submitted for approval to a content review." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:35 +msgid "``Approved`` - the content reviewer has reviewed and approved the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:37 +msgid "``Rejected`` - the content reviewer has reviewed and rejected the metadata record" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:39 +msgid "``Retired`` - the record has been retired" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:43 +msgid "To enable workflow and change the status from ``Unknown`` to ``Draft``, click the ``enable workflow`` in the metadata view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:50 +msgid "Draft status can also be set by default for records member of some groups. For this check the catalog administration > Settings and define the list of groups." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:55 +msgid "Once enabled, the different states can be set. Status can be assigned to metadata records individually." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:61 +msgid "Choose the new state, add an optional comment and click save:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:0 +msgid "Todo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:66 +msgid "Add support for a selected set of records." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:70 +msgid "When in ``Draft``, an editor can change states to:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:72 +msgid "``Unknown``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:74 +msgid "``Draft``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:76 +msgid "``Submitted``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:78 +msgid "Other status can be managed by Reviewer or Administrator." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:83 +msgid "Status actions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:85 +msgid "The status values shown above are held in a database table called ``MetadataStatus``. Extra states can be added to this table if required." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:88 +msgid "There are two status change action hooks (in Java) that can be used by sites to provide specific behaviours:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:91 +msgid "``statusChange`` - This action is called when status is changed by a user eg. when ``Draft`` records are set to ``Submitted`` and could be used for example to send notifications to other users affected by this change." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:95 +msgid "``onEdit`` - This action is called when a record is edited and saved and could be used for example to reset records with an ``Approved`` status to ``Draft`` status." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:99 +msgid "A default set of actions is provided. These can be customized or replaced by sites that wish to provide different or more extensive behaviour." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:102 +msgid "A default pair of metadata status change actions defined in Java is provided with GeoNetwork using the class org.fao.geonet.services.metadata.DefaultStatusActions.java (see :code:`core/src/main/java/org/fao/geonet/kernel/metadata/DefaultStatusActions.java`)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:107 +msgid "When status change" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:109 +msgid "This action is called when status is changed by a user. What happens depends on the status change taking place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:113 +msgid "when an ``Editor`` changes the state on a metadata record(s) from ``Draft`` or ``Unknown`` to ``Submitted``, the Content Reviewers from the groupOwner of the record are informed of the status change via email which looks like the following. They can log in and click on the link supplied in the email to access the submitted records. Here is an example email sent by this action:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:135 +msgid "when a ``Content Reviewer`` changes the state on a metadata record(s) from ``Submitted`` to ``Accepted`` or ``Rejected``, the owner of the metadata record is informed of the status change via email. The email received by the metadata record owner looks like the following. Again, the user can log in and use the link supplied in the email to access the approved/rejected records. Here is an example email sent by this action:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:158 +msgid "When editing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:160 +msgid "This action is called when a record is edited and saved by a user. If the user did not indicate that the edit changes were a ``Minor edit`` and the current status of the record is ``Approved``, then the default action is to set the status to ``Draft``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:166 +msgid "Changing the status actions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:168 +msgid "These actions can be replaced with different behaviours by:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:170 +msgid "writing Java code in the form of a new class that implements the interface defined in ``org.fao.geonet.services.metadata.StatusActions.java`` and placing a compiled version of the class in the GeoNetwork class path" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/life-cycle.rst:174 +msgid "defining the name of the new class in the statusActionsClass configuration parameter in ``web/geonetwork/WEB-INF/config.xml``" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/suggestion.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/suggestion.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18135d1b --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/suggestion.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/suggestion.rst:4 +msgid "Suggestion for improving metadata content" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/validation.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/validation.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..368096b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/validation.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/validation.rst:4 +msgid "Validation" +msgstr "" + diff --git a/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/versioning.pot b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/versioning.pot new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38ad047d --- /dev/null +++ b/_build/locale/user-guide/workflow/versioning.pot @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2001-2016, GeoNetwork opensource. Licensed under Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike (Unported) v3.0 License +# This file is distributed under the same license as the GeoNetwork opensource package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: GeoNetwork opensource 3.4\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2017-11-22 11:54+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" +"Last-Translator: FULL NAME \n" +"Language-Team: LANGUAGE \n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" + +#: ../../source/user-guide/workflow/versioning.rst:4 +msgid "Versioning" +msgstr "" +